+ All Categories
Home > Documents > Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

Date post: 02-Jun-2018
Category:
Upload: adifby
View: 243 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
204
8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 1/204 NodeB V200R013 LMT User Guide Issue 03 Date 2011-08-30 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Transcript
Page 1: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 1/204

NodeB

V200R013

LMT User Guide

Issue 03

Date 2011-08-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Page 2: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 2/204

 

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written

consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

 

Trademarks and Permissions

 and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

 All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

 

Notice

The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the

customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the

purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations

of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the

preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and

recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

 

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

 Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang

Shenzhen 518129

People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

Page 3: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 3/204

About This Document

Purpose

This document describes installation and operation methods for the NodeB Local Maintenance

Terminal (LMT).

Product Version

The following table lists the product version related to this document.

Product Name Product Version

BTS3900 WCDMA (hereinafter referred to

as BTS3900)

V200R013

BTS3900A WCDMA (hereinafter referred

to as BTS3900A)

V200R013

BTS3900L WCDMA (hereinafter referred

to as BTS3900L)

V200R013

DBS3900 WCDMA (hereinafter referred to

as DBS3900)

V200R013

 

Intended Audience

This document is intended for:

l System engineers

l Field engineers

l Shift operators

l  Network operators

Organization

1 Changes in the NodeB LMT User Guide

 NodeB

LMT User Guide About This Document

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

Page 4: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 4/204

This chapter describes changes in the NodeB LMT User Guide of each issue.

2 Introduction to the NodeB LMT

This chapter describes the functions and configuration requirements of the LMT.

3 Components of the NodeB LMT

The NodeB LMT communicates with the NodeB through a Local Ar ea Network (LAN) or Wide

Area Network (WAN). You can operate and maintain a NodeB on the LMT. The LMT consists

of the following parts: Local Maintenance Terminal, Trace Viewer, and Monitor Viewer.

4 Installing and Verifying the NodeB LMT Application

This chapter describes how to install and verify the NodeB LMT application.

5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

This chapter describes how to get started with the NodeB LMT. Before using the LMT, you

must connect, log on, and configure the LMT.

6 Running NodeB MML Commands

This chapter describes how to run Man Machine Language (MML) commands. You may run a

single MML command or batch commands.

7 Managing NodeB Alarms

This chapter describes how to manage NodeB alarms. You can set properties for the alarm

management system, query alarms and resolve problems associated with them.

8 Managing NodeB Equipment

This chapter describes how to manage the NodeB and related boards. The LMT provides the

interface of the device panel and physical topology for the routine maintenance of the NodeB.

9 Managing the Interface Tracings

After creating an interface tracing task, you can browse and save the traced messages.

10 Managing NodeB Common Monitoring

This chapter describes how to monitor the CPU/DSP occupancy of the NodeB. It consists of the

following tasks: displaying the CPU/DSP occupancy of the NodeB, browsing and saving

monitoring files. It is useful for reviewing system resources.

11 Managing the NodeB Software

This chapter describes how to upgrade the NodeB software.

12 Managing NodeB Files

This chapter describes how to download and back up the NodeB data configuration file, and

how to upload NodeB log files and the device archive file.

13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

This chapter includes procedures for monitoring the NodeB performance and status in real-time

on the LMT.

14 Managing Interference Detection for the NodeB

 NodeB

LMT User Guide About This Document

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

Page 5: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 5/204

By analyzing the spectral and power distribution of sampled data, you can monitor the

interference in the frequency and time domains in radio environments.

15 Commissioning the NodeB Equipment

This chapter describes how to commission the NodeB equipment by sending transparentmessages and performing COM port redirection.

16 Managing NodeB Frequency Spectrum Scanning

This section describes how to manage NodeB frequency spectrum scanning. This task enables

users to view information about frequency spectrum with information about the time domain

and frequency domain during operation collected. This task also enables users to review

frequency spectrum history.

Conventions

Symbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,

 performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save

time.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

important points of the main text.

 

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface  Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.

 Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Courier New.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide About This Document

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

Page 6: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 6/204

 

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

 Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all

items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

 

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK .

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

 

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt

+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means

the two keys should be pressed in turn.

 

 NodeB

LMT User Guide About This Document

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

Page 7: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 7/204

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving

the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the

 pointer to a certain position.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide About This Document

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

Page 8: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 8/204

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Changes in the NodeB LMT User Guide..................................................................................1

2 Introduction to the NodeB LMT.................................................................................................4

2.1 Definitions of  the LMT.......................................................................................................................................5

2.2 Functions of the NodeB LMT............................................................................................................................5

2.3 Computer Requirements of the LMT.................................................................................................................5

3 Components of the NodeB LMT................................................................................................7

3.1 NodeB Local Maintenance Terminal..................................................................................................................8

3.2 Trace Viewer....................................................................................................................................................10

3.3 Monitor Viewer................................................................................................................................................11

3.4 TrafficReview...................................................................................................................................................12

4 Installing and Verifying the NodeB LMT Application.......................................................14

4.1 Installing the NodeB LMT Application............................................................................................................15

4.2 Verifying the Installed NodeB LMT Application............................................................................................16

5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT.....................................................................................19

5.1 Running the NodeB LMT.................................................................................................................................20

5.1.1 Setting the IP Address of the NodeB LMT PC.......................................................................................20

5.1.2 Locally Connecting the NodeB LMT PC to the NodeB..........................................................................22

5.1.3 Remotely Connecting the NodeB LMT PC to the NodeB (Through RNC BAM)..................................23

5.1.4 Remotely Connecting the NodeB LMT PC to the NodeB (Through M2000)........................................24

5.1.5 Setting the Route from the NodeB LMT PC to the NodeB.....................................................................24

5.1.6 Locally Logging In to the NodeB on the NodeB LMT...........................................................................25

5.1.7 Remotely Logging In to the NodeB LMT (Through RNC BAM)..........................................................26

5.1.8 Remotely Logging In to the NodeB LMT (Through M2000).................................................................27

5.2 Setting the Properties of the NodeB LMT........................................................................................................28

5.3 Changing the Password for Login to the NodeB LMT....................................................................................29

5.4 Setting the Information About an Office on the NodeB LMT.........................................................................30

5.5 Locking the NodeB LMT.................................................................................................................................31

5.6 Unlocking the NodeB LMT..............................................................................................................................32

5.7 Exiting from the NodeB LMT..........................................................................................................................32

6 Running NodeB MML Commands..........................................................................................33

 NodeB

LMT User Guide Contents

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

Page 9: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 9/204

6.1 Introduction to NodeB MML Commands........................................................................................................34

6.2 Running a Single NodeB MML Command......................................................................................................36

6.3 Running NodeB Batch MML Commands........................................................................................................37

7 Managing NodeB Alarms..........................................................................................................407.1 Concepts Related to NodeB Alarm Management.............................................................................................41

7.1.1 Alarm Types............................................................................................................................................41

7.1.2 Alarm Logs..............................................................................................................................................41

7.1.3 Alarm Severity.........................................................................................................................................41

7.1.4 Alarm Classification Based on Network Management...........................................................................42

7.2 Setting the Properties of the NodeB Alarm Management System...................................................................42

7.2.1 Setting the Properties of the NodeB Alarm Query Window...................................................................43

7.2.2 Setting NodeB Alarm Prompt..................................................................................................................44

7.2.3 Setting the Preferences for Printing Alarms in Real Time......................................................................45

7.3 Handling NodeB Alarms..................................................................................................................................46

7.3.1 Browsing Alarms.....................................................................................................................................46

7.3.2 Querying Alarm Logs..............................................................................................................................46

7.3.3 Manually Recovering an Alarm..............................................................................................................48

7.3.4 Saving the Information of a NodeB Alarm.............................................................................................48

7.3.5 Manually Printing Alarm Information.....................................................................................................49

7.3.6 Querying Alarm Handling Suggestions...................................................................................................49

7.3.7 Shielding NodeB Alarms.........................................................................................................................50

7.3.8 Clearing the Alarms.................................................................................................................................52

7.3.9 Refr eshing the Alarm Window................................................................................................................52

8 Managing NodeB Equipment...................................................................................................54

8.1 Operating the NodeB Device Panel..................................................................................................................55

8.1.1 Introduction to the NodeB Device Panel.................................................................................................55

8.1.2 Starting the NodeB Device Panel............................................................................................................56

8.1.3 Showing or Hiding the Legend on the NodeB Device Panel..................................................................56

8.1.4 Showing or Hiding the Failure Bar on the NodeB Device Panel............................................................57

8.2 Using the Physical Topology............................................................................................................................57

8.2.1 Introduction to Physical Topology..........................................................................................................58

8.2.2 Starting the Physical Topology................................................................................................................608.2.3 Showing or Hiding the Legend of the Physical Topology......................................................................60

8.3 NodeB-Level Operations..................................................................................................................................61

8.3.1 Querying the Active Version of the NodeB............................................................................................61

8.3.2 Querying the Software Version of the NodeB.........................................................................................61

8.3.3 Resetting the NodeB................................................................................................................................62

8.4 NodeB Board-Level Operations.......................................................................................................................63

8.4.1 Introduction to NodeB Board-Oriented Operations................................................................................63

8.4.2 Querying the State of a NodeB Board.....................................................................................................65

8.4.3 Querying Active Alarms of NodeB Boards.............................................................................................67

8.4.4 Querying the Version of a NodeB Board................................................................................................68

 NodeB

LMT User Guide Contents

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

Page 10: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 10/204

8.4.5 Querying the CPU Usage of a NodeB Board..........................................................................................68

8.4.6 Querying the E1/T1 Link Status..............................................................................................................69

8.4.7 Querying the E1/T1 Work Mode.............................................................................................................70

8.4.8 Querying the STM-1 State.......................................................................................................................70

8.4.9 Querying the STM-1 Working Mode......................................................................................................71

8.4.10 Blocking/Unblocking a NodeB Board...................................................................................................72

8.4.11 Resetting a NodeB Board......................................................................................................................73

8.4.12 Adding and Removing a NodeB Board.................................................................................................74

8.4.13 Querying the Current Clock Status........................................................................................................74

8.4.14 Querying the Sequence ID of the RRU.................................................................................................75

8.4.15 Adding a Sector.....................................................................................................................................76

8.4.16 Modifying the Emission Power of the RRU..........................................................................................78

8.4.17 Setting Floor and Position.....................................................................................................................79

8.4.18 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information...................................................................................79

8.4.19 Opening the Related Shelf.....................................................................................................................80

9 Managing the Interface Tracings..............................................................................................81

9.1 Basic Concepts of the Interface Tracing...........................................................................................................83

9.2 Tracing Iub interface Messages........................................................................................................................83

9.3 Tracing SCTP Messages...................................................................................................................................84

9.4 Tracing IP Messages.........................................................................................................................................85

9.5 Tracing ICP Messages......................................................................................................................................85

9.6 Tracing SAAL Messages..................................................................................................................................85

9.7 Tracing User Messages.....................................................................................................................................86

9.8 Tracing Cell Messages......................................................................................................................................87

9.9 Tracing PPP Messages......................................................................................................................................87

9.10 Tracing MP Messages....................................................................................................................................88

9.11 Tracing MAC Messages.................................................................................................................................88

9.12 Tracing PTP Messages...................................................................................................................................88

9.13 Basic Operations of Interface Tracings..........................................................................................................89

9.13.1 Browsing Traced Messages Online.......................................................................................................89

9.13.2 Querying the Properties of the Tracing Task.........................................................................................90

9.13.3 Viewing a Message Translation............................................................................................................909.13.4 Automatically Saving Traced Messages................................................................................................91

9.13.5 Saving Traced Messages Manually.......................................................................................................91

9.13.6 Suspending a Tracing Task....................................................................................................................92

9.13.7 Resuming a Tracing Task......................................................................................................................92

9.13.8 Closing a Tracing Task..........................................................................................................................92

9.13.9 Browsing a Traced Message Offline.....................................................................................................93

9.14 Interface Ref erence for Managing the Interface Tracing...............................................................................93

9.14.1 Interface Reference for IUB Tracing.....................................................................................................94

9.14.2 Interface Reference for SCTP Tracing..................................................................................................94

9.14.3 Interface Reference for IP Tracing........................................................................................................94

 NodeB

LMT User Guide Contents

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

Page 11: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 11/204

9.14.4 Interface Reference for ICP Tracing......................................................................................................95

9.14.5 Interface Reference for SAAL Tracing.................................................................................................96

9.14.6 Interface Reference for User Tracing....................................................................................................96

9.14.7 Interface Reference for Cell Tracing.....................................................................................................97

9.14.8 Interface Reference for PPP Tracing.....................................................................................................98

9.14.9 Interface Reference for MP Tracing......................................................................................................98

9.14.10 Interface Reference for MAC Tracing.................................................................................................99

9.14.11 Interf ace Reference for PTP Tracing.................................................................................................100

9.14.12 Interf ace Reference for Trace Viewer...............................................................................................100

10 Managing NodeB Common Monitoring.............................................................................102

10.1 Displaying the NodeB CPU/DSP Usage......................................................................................................103

10.2 Saving NodeB Monitoring Files...................................................................................................................104

10.3 Browsing a NodeB CPU/DSP Monitoring File Offline..................................................... ..........................105

10.4 Interface Reference for Managing NodeB Common Monitoring.................................................................105

10.4.1 Interface Reference for Adding a Monitoring Task............................................................................105

10.4.2 Interface Reference for CPU/DSP Usage Monitoring.........................................................................106

11 Managing the NodeB Software.............................................................................................107

11.1 Overview of  the NodeB Software................................................................................................................108

11.2 Managing the BootROM Software of the NodeB........................................................................................109

11.2.1 Downloading the NodeB BootROM...................................................................................................109

11.2.2 Activating the NodeB BootROM........................................................................................................110

11.3 Upgrading the NodeB Software...................................................................................................................111

11.3.1 Downloading the NodeB Software......................................................................................................111

11.3.2 Supplying the NodeB Software...........................................................................................................112

11.3.3 Activating the NodeB Software...........................................................................................................113

11.3.4 Activating Board Software..................................................................................................................114

11.3.5 Synchr onizing Software Versions of the NodeB.................................................................................115

11.4 Managing the NodeB Cold Patch.................................................................................................................116

11.4.1 Downloading the NodeB Cold Patch...................................................................................................116

11.4.2 Supplying the NodeB Cold Patch........................................................................................................117

11.4.3 Activating NodeB Cold Patch.............................................................................................................118

11.4.4 Downloading the Cold Patch for the NodeB BootROM.....................................................................11911.4.5 Activating the Cold Patch for the NodeB BootROM..........................................................................120

11.5 Managing the NodeB Hot Patch...................................................................................................................121

11.5.1 Downloading the NodeB Hot Patch....................................................................................................121

11.5.2 Activating the NodeB Hot Patch.........................................................................................................122

11.5.3 Confirming the NodeB Hot Patch.......................................................................................................123

11.5.4 Deactivating the NodeB Hot Patch......................................................................................................124

11.5.5 Removing the NodeB Hot Patch.........................................................................................................124

11.5.6 Rolling Back the NodeB Hot Patch.....................................................................................................125

11.6 Managing the Multi-Version Software of the NodeB..................................................................................126

11.6.1 Downloading the Multi-Version Software of the NodeB....................................................................126

 NodeB

LMT User Guide Contents

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

x

Page 12: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 12/204

11.6.2 Activating the Multi-Version Software of the NodeB.........................................................................127

11.7 Interface Reference for Managing NodeB Software....................................................................................128

11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating the Software...................................................................................128

11.7.2 Interface Reference for Supplying NodeB Software...........................................................................129

11.7.3 Interface Reference for Synchronizing Version..................................................................................130

11.7.4 Interface Reference for Activating Board Software............................................................................130

11.7.5 Interface Reference for Upgrading NodeB Software..........................................................................130

11.7.6 Interface Reference for Status Description and Progress Indicator.....................................................132

11.7.7 Interface Reference for Upgrading BootROM....................................................................................133

11.7.8 Interface Reference for Upgrading Patch............................................................................................133

11.7.9 Interface Reference for Upgrading NodeB Hot Patch.........................................................................134

11.7.10 Interface Reference for Upgrading Multi-Version Software.............................................................135

11.7.11 Interface Reference for Setting FTP Server.......................................................................................135

12 Managing NodeB Files...........................................................................................................137

12.1 Concepts of NodeB File Management..........................................................................................................138

12.1.1 File Types of the NodeB......................................................................................................................138

12.1.2 Obtaining NodeB Files........................................................................................................................140

12.2 Managing the NodeB Data Configuration Files...........................................................................................140

12.2.1 Downloading the NodeB Data Configuration File..............................................................................141

12.2.2 Backing up the NodeB Data Configuration File.................................................................................141

12.3 Uploading NodeB Files to the FTP Server...................................................................................................142

12.3.1 Uploading the NodeB Log File to the FTP Server..............................................................................142

12.3.2 Uploading NodeB Device Archive File...............................................................................................14412.4 Downloading the NodeB Extral Configuration File.....................................................................................145

12.5 Interface Ref erence for Managing the NodeB File.......................................................................................145

12.5.1 Interface Reference for Data Configure File Transfer.........................................................................145

12.5.2 Interface Reference for Device Archives Transfer..............................................................................146

12.5.3 Interface Reference for Transferring Other Files................................................................................147

12.5.4 Interface Reference for Detailed Information About Successful and Failed Files..............................149

12.5.5 Interface Reference for Downloading Extral XML configuration file................................................149

13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time...........................................................151

13.1 Collecting the IP Clock Data........................................................................................................................15313.2 Monitoring the Traffic over the Transmission Ports....................................................................................153

13.3 Monitoring the Traffic over the Transmission Links...................................................................................156

13.4 Querying the Service Resources of a Cell....................................................................................................158

13.5 Measuring the Cell-Level RTWP.................................................................................................................160

13.6 Measuring the Board-Level RTWP..............................................................................................................161

13.7 Testing the NodeB Clock.............................................................................................................................162

13.8 Scanning the Uplink Frequency...................................................................................................................163

13.9 Monitoring Output Power of the NodeB......................................................................................................164

13.10 Monitoring the Temperature of the NodeB................................................................................................166

13.11 Querying the Resources of a NodeB Board................................................................................................167

 NodeB

LMT User Guide Contents

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

Page 13: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 13/204

13.12 Monitoring the Cell Service Throughput....................................................................................................168

13.13 Common Operations for Real-time Performance Monitoring on the NodeB.............................................169

13.13.1 Browsing Monitoring Results of NodeB Online...............................................................................169

13.13.2 Saving Monitoring Results of the NodeB..........................................................................................169

13.13.3 Stopping a Monitoring Task of the NodeB.......................................................................................170

13.13.4 Browsing Monitoring Results of the NodeB Offline.........................................................................170

13.14 Interface Reference for Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time..............................................171

13.14.1 Interface Reference for Collecting IP Clock Data.............................................................................171

13.14.2 Interface Reference for Traffic Monitoring over the Transmission Ports.........................................171

13.14.3 Interface Reference for Traffic Monitoring over the Transmission Links........................................174

13.14.4 Interface Reference for Querying Cell Service Resources................................................................176

13.14.5 Interface Reference for Measuring the Cell RTWP..........................................................................177

13.14.6 Interface Reference for Measuring the Board RTWP.......................................................................177

13.14.7 Interface Reference for Testing the Clock.........................................................................................177

13.14.8 Interface Reference for Scanning the UL Frequency........................................................................178

13.14.9 Interface Reference for Monitoring the Output Power......................................................................178

13.14.10 Interface Reference for Monitoring the Temperature......................................................................179

13.14.11 Interface Reference for Querying the Resources of a Board...........................................................179

13.14.12 Interface Reference for the Cell Traffic Throughput Statistics.......................................................180

14 Managing Interference Detection for the NodeB..............................................................181

14.1 Interface Reference for Interference Detection............................................................................................183

15 Commissioning the NodeB Equipment..............................................................................184

15.1 Starting the Serial Port Redirection..............................................................................................................185

15.2 Starting CANBUS Redirection.....................................................................................................................185

15.3 Sending Transparent Messages....................................................................................................................186

15.4 Interface Reference for Commissioning the NodeB Equipment..................................................................186

15.4.1 Interface Reference for Setting the Serial Port Redirection................................................................187

15.4.2 Interface Reference for Transparent Messages....................................................................................187

15.4.3 Interface Reference for Setting the Serial Port Redirection................................................................187

15.4.4 Interface Reference for SerialCmd .....................................................................................................187

16 Managing NodeB Frequency Spectrum Scanning............................................................18916.1 Interface Ref erence for FFT Frequency Spectrum Scanning.......................................................................191

 NodeB

LMT User Guide Contents

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xii

Page 14: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 14/204

1 Chang es in the NodeB LMT User Guide

This chapter describes changes in the NodeB LMT User Guide of each issue.

03 (2011-08-30)

This is the third commercial release.

Compared with 02 (2011-06-10), this issue does not add any information.

Compared with 02 (2011-06-10), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

13.6 Measuring the Board-Level RTWP Updated the monitoring items and related

descriptions.

 

Compared with 02 (2011-06-10), this issue does not exclude any topics.

02 (2011-06-10)

This is the second commercial release.

Compared with 01 (2011-04-10), this issue does not add any information.

Compared with 01 (2011-04-10), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

16 Managing NodeB Frequency Spectrum

Scanning

Description in note is added.

12.4 Downloading the NodeB Extral

Configuration File

The section is added: DownLoading the

 NodeB Extral Configuration File.

12.5.5 Interface Reference for

Downloading Extral XML configuration

file

An interface reference for Downloading

Extral XML configuration file is added.

 

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 1 Changes in the NodeB LMT User Guide

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1

Page 15: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 15/204

Compared with 01 (2011-04-10), this issue does not exclude any topics.

01 (2011-04-10)

This is the initial commercial release.

Compared with Draft A (2011-01-20), this issue does not add any information.

Compared with Draft A (2011-01-20), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

16 Managing NodeB Frequency Spectrum

Scanning

Description about managing NodeB

frequency spectrum scanning is added.

5.1.6 Locally Logging In to the NodeB on

the NodeB LMT

The section is added: Starting CANBUS

Redirection.

15.4 Interface Reference forCommissioning the NodeB Equipment

Serial port commands and interfacereferences for setting serial port redirection

are added.

11.7 Interface Reference for Managing

NodeB Software

Three interface reference sections are added:

Supplying NodeB Software, Software

Synchronization Status, and Activating

Board Software.

13.1 Collecting the IP Clock Data Description about IP clock data is changed.

9 Managing the Interface Tracings Two sections are added: Tracing PPP

Messages and Tracing MP Messages.

9.14 Interface Reference for Managing the

Interface Tracing

Two interface reference sections are added:

Tracing PPP Messages and Tracing MP

Messages.

13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in

Real Time

Cell-level measurement of received total

wideband power (RTWP) is added.

13.14.5 Interface Reference for Measuring

the Cell RTWP

An interface reference for cell-level RTWP

measurement is added.

8.4.9 Querying the STM-1 Working Mode MML mode about querying the STM-1

Working Mode is modified.

8.4.18 Querying the Board Manufacturing

Information

MML mode about querying the Board

Manufacturing Information is modified.

 

Compared with Draft A (2011-01-20), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft A (2011-01-20)

This is Draft A of V200R013.

Compared with issue 03 (2010-06-05) of V200R012, this issue does not add any information.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 1 Changes in the NodeB LMT User Guide

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2

Page 16: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 16/204

Compared with issue 03 (2010-06-05) of V200R012, this issue incorporates the following

changes:

Content Description

5.1.6 Locally Logging In to the NodeB onthe NodeB LMT

The procedure for logging in to the NodeBthrough the LMT is updated.

5.1.7 Remotely Logging In to the NodeB

LMT (Through RNC BAM)

The procedure for logging in to the NodeB

through the LMT is updated.

5.1.8 Remotely Logging In to the NodeB

LMT (Through M2000)

The procedure for logging in to the NodeB

through the LMT is updated.

9.14.5 Interface Reference for SAAL

Tracing

The interface reference for SAAL tracing is

updated.

13.2 Monitoring the Traffic over the

Transmission Ports

Description about the result of traffic

monitoring over ports is modified.

13.3 Monitoring the Traffic over the

Transmission Links

Description about the result of traffic

monitoring over transmission links is

modified.

13.14.2 Interface Reference for Traffic

Monitoring over the Transmission Ports

The interface reference for traffic monitoring

over ports is updated.

13.14.3 Interface Reference for Traffic

Monitoring over the Transmission Links

The interface reference for traffic monitoring

over transmission links is updated.

 

Compared with issue 03 (2010-06-05) of V200R012, this issue excludes the following topic:

l  NodeB RF performance test (141 test)

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 1 Changes in the NodeB LMT User Guide

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3

Page 17: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 17/204

2 Introduction to the NodeB LMT

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the functions and configuration requirements of the LMT.

2.1 Definitions of the LMT

This section provides definitions of the LMT, LMT PC, and LMT application, which helps users

differentiate between them.

2.2 Functions of the NodeB LMT

The NodeB LMT is used for NodeB commissioning, routine maintenance, and troubleshooting.

2.3 Computer Requirements of the LMTThis section describes the hardware and software requirements of the LMT, and the

communication capability requirements.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4

Page 18: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 18/204

2.1 Definitions of the LMT

This section provides definitions of the LMT, LMT PC, and LMT application, which helps users

differentiate between them.

LMT

LMT is the operation and maintenance (OM) terminal installed with the Huawei Local

Maintenance Terminal software group, and connected to the actual OM network of the related

 NE. The LMT is used to operate and maintain an NE.

LMT PC

The LMT PC is the hardware of the LMT. It is the computer installed with the LMT application.

LMT Application

The LMT application refers to the Huawei proprietary application, the Huawei Local

Maintenance Terminal software group, which is installed on the LMT PC.

2.2 Functions of the NodeB LMT

The NodeB LMT is used for NodeB commissioning, routine maintenance, and troubleshooting.

The NodeB LMT provides the following functions:

l Graphic user interfaces

l Alarm management, equipment management, message tracing management, software

Management, file management, real-time monitoring, equipment commission, and

frequency spectrum scanning

l MML commands are used for overall configuration and maintenance

2.3 Computer Requirements of the LMT

This section describes the hardware and software requirements of the LMT, and the

communication capability requirements.

Hardware Requirements

Table 2-1 lists the hardware requirements of the computer on which the LMT application resides.

Table 2-1 Hardware Requirements

Item Quantity RecommendedConfiguration

Minimum Configuration

CPU 1 2.8 GHz or better 866 MHz

RAM 1 512 MB 256 MB

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5

Page 19: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 19/204

Item Quantity RecommendedConfiguration

Minimum Configuration

Hard

drive

1 80 GB 10 GB

Display

adapter 

resolutio

n

- 1024 x 768 pixels or better 800 x600 pixels

CD drive 1 - -

 Network 

adapter 

1 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s

Others 5 x 1 pixels Keyboard, mouse, modem,

audio adapter, sound box

-

 

Software Requirements

Table 2-2 lists the software requirements of the computer on which the LMT application resides.

Table 2-2 Software requirements

Item Recommended Configuration

Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Professional

Default language of the

operating system

English (United States)

Web browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later  

 

NOTE

To ensure stable operation, install the LMT application on a computer with the recommended

configurations.

Communication Capability Requirements

Install the LMT application on a computer that supports the TCP/IP protocols.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6

Page 20: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 20/204

3 Components of the NodeB LMT

About This Chapter

The NodeB LMT communicates with the NodeB through a Local Area Network (LAN) or Wide

Area Networ k (WAN). You can operate and maintain a NodeB on the LMT. The LMT consists

of the following parts: Local Maintenance Terminal, Trace Viewer, and Monitor Viewer.

3.1 NodeB Local Maintenance Terminal

The LMT is a subsystem of the LMT application. On the graphical user interface (GUI) of the

LMT, you can perform tasks such as fault management, file management, equipment

management, message tracing, and real-time monitoring. In addition, the LMT supports many

MML commands for overall configuration and maintenance of the system. To use the LMT for online OM, ensure that the LMT communicates with the NodeB properly.

3.2 Trace Viewer 

The Trace Viewer works in offline mode, and permits you to browse saved messages in .tmf 

format.

3.3 Monitor Viewer 

The Monitor Viewer works in offline mode, and permits you to browse saved CPU occupancy

files in .mrf format.

3.4 TrafficReview

The TrafficReViewer works in offline mode, and permits you to browse saved messages in .mmf 

format.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 3 Components of the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7

Page 21: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 21/204

3.1 NodeB Local Maintenance Terminal

The LMT is a subsystem of the LMT application. On the graphical user interface (GUI) of theLMT, you can perform tasks such as fault management, file management, equipment

management, message tracing, and real-time monitoring. In addition, the LMT supports many

MML commands for overall configuration and maintenance of the system. To use the LMT for 

online OM, ensure that the LMT communicates with the NodeB properly.

Interface

Figure 3-1 shows the window of the Local Maintenance Terminal.

Figure 3-1 Local Maintenance Terminal window

 

Table 3-1 describes the fields in the Local Maintenance Terminal window.

Table 3-1 Fields in the Local Maintenance Terminal window

No. Field Description

1 Menu bar Provides access to most operations of the system.

2 Toolbar Provides shortcut icons for easy operation.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 3 Components of the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8

Page 22: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 22/204

No. Field Description

3 Navigation pane Lists various objects in a tree structure. It includes the

Maintenance, MML Command and Device Panel tabs.

4 Object pane Lists details about each operation.

If you select MML Command in the navigation pane, the

MML client is displayed in this pane.

5 Output pane Records details about current operation and information

returned from the system. It includes the Common and

Maintenance tabs.

6 Status bar Displays the user name, connection status, and IP address.

 

Online Help

The LMT has two types of online help:

l LMT help system

l MML help

Table 3-2 describes the content of the two types of online help and their startup methods.

Table 3-2 Description of the LMT online help

Name Content Startup Method

Local

Maintenance

Terminal

help system

Provides the following

information:

l Meanings of the

fields in the dialog

 box

l Guidelines for 

operations on the

LMT

l Details about MML

commands

l Details about analarm

l Technical terms and

abbreviations

l Press F1 or select Help > Help Topics or click 

 on the toolbar to display the Local

Maintenance Terminal help system.

l In a dialog box, press F1 to display the help

information.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 3 Components of the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9

Page 23: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 23/204

Name Content Startup Method

MML help Provides the following

information about each

MML command:

l Function

l  Note

l Parameter 

l Example

l Output description

(applicable to the

commands for 

querying purposes

only)

lRelevant tasks

Type the MML command in the MML client. Press

Enter or click to display the Help

Information window.

 

3.2 Trace Viewer

The Trace Viewer works in offline mode, and permits you to browse saved messages in .tmf 

format.

Interface

Select Start >All Programs >HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal > Trace Viewer. The

Open dialog box is displayed. Select the trace report from the directory. Click Open. The Trace

Viewer window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 3 Components of the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

Page 24: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 24/204

Figure 3-2 Trace Viewer window

 

Online Help

Table 3-3 describes the content of the Trace Viewer online help and its startup method.

Table 3-3 Description of the Trace Viewer online help

Content Startup Method

Introduction to the Trace

Viewer and description on

how to use it

In the Trace Viewer window, press F1, choose Help > Help

Topics, or click on the toolbar to display the help

information.

 

3.3 Monitor Viewer

The Monitor Viewer works in offline mode, and permits you to browse saved CPU occupancy

files in .mrf format.

Interface

Choose Start > All Programs > HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal > Monitor

Viewer. The Open dialog box is displayed. Select the monitoring files from the directory. Click 

Open, The Monitor Viewer window is displayed, and as shown in Figure 3-3.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 3 Components of the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

Page 25: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 25/204

Figure 3-3 Monitor Viewer window

 

Online Help

Table 3-4 describes the content of the online help and its startup method.

Table 3-4 Description of the Monitor Viewer online help

Content Startup Method

Introduction to the

Monitor Viewer and

description on how to use

it

In the Monitor Viewer window, press F1, choose Help > Help

Topics or click on the toolbar to display the help

information.

 

3.4 TrafficReviewThe TrafficReViewer works in offline mode, and permits you to browse saved messages in .mmf 

format.

Interface

Select Start > All Programs > HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal > FreqChart

FreqChartReview Tool. The Open dialog box is displayed. Select the frequency spectrum

report from the directory. Click Open. The TrafficReviewr  window is displayed,Click in

the displayed window and the frequency spectrum information is displayed.,as shown in Figure3-4.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 3 Components of the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

Page 26: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 26/204

Figure 3-4 TrafficReview window

 

Online Help

Table 3-5 describes the content of the TrafficReview online help and its startup method.

Table 3-5 Description of the Trace Viewer online help

Content Startup Method

Introduction to the

TrafficReview and

description on how to use it

In the TrafficReview window, press F1, choose Help > Help

Topics, or click on the toolbar to display the helpinformation.

 

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 3 Components of the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

Page 27: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 27/204

4 Installing and Verifying the NodeB LMT

Application

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to install and verify the NodeB LMT application.

4.1 Installing the NodeB LMT Application

This section describes how to install the LMT application on the LMT PC.

4.2 Verifying the Installed NodeB LMT Application

This section describes how to verify the installed LMT application by starting the LMT and

checking the installation path.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 4 Installing and Verifying the NodeB LMT Application

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

Page 28: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 28/204

4.1 Installing the NodeB LMT Application

This section describes how to install the LMT application on the LMT PC.

Prerequisite

l The setup disk and instruction provided by Huawei are available.

l A valid CD-KEY to the LMT application is available.

l You have logged into the operating system as an administrator.

Procedure

Step 1 Insert the setup disk into the CD-ROM drive.

The setup application is automatically launched. If the system fails to launch the setup, open thedirectory of the setup disk and double-click on setup.exe.

Step 2 Select the language to be used in the installation in the dialog box.

Step 3 Click OK . A dialog box displays the introduction of the installation.

Step 4 Read the introduction, and then click Next. A dialog box displays the copyright notice.

Step 5 Read the agreement and select I accept these terms.

NOTE

The Next button is enabled only after you select I accept these terms.

Step 6 Click Next. The Installation Directory dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 Click Next to use the default installation path. A dialog box displays and requires you to select

the software components.

You can also customize the installation path.

NOTE

l The default installation path is D:\HW LMT.

l If LMT software of other products is already installed, the installation path cannot be changed.

l If the installation path needs to be changed during this installation, LMT software of other products

must be uninstalled before beginning this installation.

Step 8 Select the required software components (preferably all), and then click Next. The Please Input

CD KEY window is displayed.

Step 9 Enter a valid CD-KEY, and then click Next. The Confirm installation dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

The CD-KEY is supplied together with the installation disc. You can find the key in a SN.TXT file in the

software package.

The Next button is available only after you enter a correct CD-KEY.

Step 10 Confirm that all the setup information is correct, and then click Next. A progress indicator isdisplayed, showing the installation progress.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 4 Installing and Verifying the NodeB LMT Application

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

Page 29: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 29/204

Step 11 After all the files are copied, the Initializing Components dialog box is displayed to show the

 progress.

Step 12 After the LMT application is installed, the Installation completed dialog box is displayed.

Step 13 Click Finish. The LMT application installation is complete.

NOTE

l To restore the installation files in case of damage, it is recommended that you back up the installation

directory to a path different from the installation path.

l After the LMT application is installed, the system automatically starts the LMT Service Manager.

l After the LMT application is installed, a dialog box is displayed. Click Yes to start the LMT now, or 

click No to start it later.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureAfter installation, you can start the following applications through the HUAWEI Local

Maintenance Terminal program group:

l LMT Service Manager 

l Local Maintenance Terminal

l Trace Viewer 

l Monitor Viewer 

l Uninstall Local Maintenance Terminal

l TrafficReview

4.2 Verifying the Installed NodeB LMT Application

This section describes how to verify the installed LMT application by starting the LMT and

checking the installation path.

Context

Table 4-1 describes the directories in the LMT application installation directory.

Table 4-1 LMT application installation directories

Directory Description

\adaptor\clientadaptor\NodeB\ LMT 

 software version\output\realmonitor 

Location for saving result files of the real-time

 performance monitor tasks

\client\output\monitor Location for saving the result file of CPU/DSP

Usage monitoring task 

\client\output\main\NodeB\ LMT 

 software version\trace

Location for saving the result file of a tracing task 

\adaptor\clientadaptor\NodeB\ LMT 

 software version\help

Location for saving the online help of LMT software

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 4 Installing and Verifying the NodeB LMT Application

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

Page 30: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 30/204

Directory Description

\uninstall Location for saving the information on uninstalled

components

 NOTE

l These are the default saving paths.

l Some folders are created only when the related task results are saved.

Procedure

l To start the LMT of the NodeB, perform the following steps:

1. Check whether is displayed in the status area. If the icon is not displayed, select

Start > All Programs > HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal > LMT Service

Manager. The LMT Service Manager is started.

2. Select Start > All Programs > HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal > Local

Maintenance Terminal to start the Local Maintenance Terminal. If the User

Login dialog box is displayed, it indicates that the LMT application is installed

successfully.

NOTE

For details about how to log in to the LMT, refer to 5.1.6 Locally Logging In to the NodeB

on the NodeB LMT.

l To confirm the installation path, perform the following step:

Open the installation path through Explorer and review the directory structure, as shown

in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 Directory structure of the LMT application

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 4 Installing and Verifying the NodeB LMT Application

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

Page 31: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 31/204

 

----End

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 4 Installing and Verifying the NodeB LMT Application

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

Page 32: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 32/204

5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to get started with the NodeB LMT. Before using the LMT, you

must connect, log on, and configure the LMT.

5.1 Running the NodeB LMT

This section describes how to set the NodeB IP address, connect it to the NodeB, and then log

on to the NodeB LMT. When the LMT is running, ensure the hard drive has at least 1 GB of 

free space.

5.2 Setting the Properties of the NodeB LMT

This section describes how to set the properties of the NodeB LMT. Configuration consists of 

the following tasks: setting the office, setting the time-out duration of MML commands, setting

the system lock time, and running batch MML commands.

5.3 Changing the Password for Login to the NodeB LMT

This section describes how to change the password for logging in to the NodeB. You can log in

to the NodeB only if the correct password is entered.

5.4 Setting the Information About an Office on the NodeB LMT

This section describes how to set the IP address of the M2000 server or the NodeB.

5.5 Locking the NodeB LMT

This section describes how to lock the NodeB LMT to ensure secure operation. Lock the system

to avoid illegal operations when it is not in use.

5.6 Unlocking the NodeB LMT

This section describes how to unlock the LMT. Once the NodeB LMT is locked, you must log

on to it again by entering the correct password.

5.7 Exiting from the NodeB LMT

This section describes how to exit from the NodeB LMT. If you exit the LMT, you will

disconnect the LMT from the NodeB and close the LMT. If you log on to the NodeB through

the M2000 server, you will also disconnect the LMT from the M2000.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

Page 33: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 33/204

5.1 Running the NodeB LMT

This section describes how to set the NodeB IP address, connect it to the NodeB, and then log

on to the NodeB LMT. When the LMT is running, ensure the hard drive has at least 1 GB of 

free space.

5.1.1 Setting the IP Address of the NodeB LMT PC

This section describes how to set the IP address of the LMT PC. You must set a correct IP address

for the LMT PC before logging in to the NodeB.

Prerequisite

The TCP/IP protocol is configured on the LMT PC.

Context

Before you perform the maintenance, set the IP address for the LMT PC as follows:

l In local maintenance, IP addresses of the LMT PC and the NodeB local maintenance

channel are in the same network segment.

l In remote maintenance, IP 1 and IP 2 are in the same network segment, as shown in Figure

5-1. IP 1 stands for the IP address of the LMT PC. IP 2 stands for the IP address of the

external network composed of the entity directly connected to the LMT PC and the LAN

where the LMT PC is located. For example, the IP address of the RNC BAM external

network.

Figure 5-1 IP addresses in remote maintenance mode

 

CAUTION

Ensure that the IP address of the LMT PC does not conflict with the IP address of another 

computer within the same local area network.

Procedure

Step 1 For example, to set the IP address of the LMT PC with the Windows XP operating system, perform the following steps: Choose Start > Control Panel.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

Page 34: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 34/204

If... Then...

The control panel is displayed in category

view,

Go to Step 2.

The control panel is displayed in classicalview,

Go to Step 3.

 

Step 2 Click Network and Internet Connections.

Step 3 Double-click Network Connections. The Network Connections window is displayed. Right-

click the icon of Local Area Connection.

Step 4 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Local Area Connection Properties dialog

 box is displayed.

Step 5 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).

Step 6 Click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 Select Use the following IP address.

Step 8 Enter the correct IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

If... Then...

The LMT PC is used in local maintenance

mode,

Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default

gateway, as shown in Table 5-1.

The LMT PC is used in remote maintenancemode, Set the IP address, subnet mask, and defaultgateway, as shown in Table 5-2.

 

Table 5-1 IP parameters of the LMT PC for commissioning on the NodeB local side

Parameter Description

IP Address The IP address of the LMT PC is in the same network segment as that

of the NodeB local maintenance channel.

In local maintenance mode, the default NodeB IP address is 17.21.2.15.

Subnet mask The LMT PC has the same subnet mask as that of the NodeB local

maintenance channel.

Default gateway None

 

Table 5-2 IP parameters of the LMT PC for commissioning on the NodeB remote side

Parameter Description

IP Address The IP address of the LMT PC is in the same network segment as the

external IP address of RNC BAM.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

Page 35: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 35/204

Parameter Description

Subnet mask The subnet mask of the LMT PC is the same as the external subnet mask 

of RNC BAM.

Default gateway The IP address of the BAM external network is the gateway from theLMT to the NodeB.

 

NOTE

In the same network, the IP address subnet mask are the same, and the subnet address (the result of the IP

address and the subnet mask logical merge.) are the same as well.

Step 9 Click OK  to complete the settings.

----End

5.1.2 Locally Connecting the NodeB LMT PC to the NodeB

This section describes how to connect the LMT PC to the BBU3900 in local maintenance mode

for operating and maintaining the NodeB.

Prerequisite

The IP address of the LMT PC and that of the NodeB local maintenance channel are in the same

network segment.

ProcedureStep 1 To connect the LMT PC to the NodeB, perform the following steps:

Connect the Ethernet port of the LMT PC to the maintenance-oriented Ethernet port of the

BBU3900 with a crossover cable, as shown in Figure 5-2.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

Page 36: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 36/204

Figure 5-2 Connecting LMT PC and BBU3900 in local maintenance mode

(1) BBU3900 (2) Crossover cable (3) LMT PC

 

Step 2 On the LMT PC, choose Start > Run, and then run the cmd command in the Run dialog box.

The command window is displayed.

Step 3 Run ping target_name -t and verify the connection between the LMT PC and the NodeB.

Where, target_name represents the IP address of the NodeB local maintenance channel.

----End

5.1.3 Remotely Connecting the NodeB LMT PC to the NodeB(Through RNC BAM)

This section describes how to connect the NodeB LMT PC to RAN OM intranet (that is, the

RNC BAM external network) in remote maintenance mode.

Prerequisite

The IP address of the remote NodeB LMT PC is set and it is in the same network segment as

the external IP address of the RNC BAM.

Procedure

Step 1 Use an Ethernet cable to connect the Ethernet port of the LMT PC to one Ethernet port of the

RAN OM intranet (that is, the RNC BAM external network).

Step 2 On the LMT PC, choose Start > Run, and then run the cmd command in the Run dialog box.

The command window is displayed.

Step 3 Run ping target_name -t and verify the connection between the LMT PC and the communication

gateway. Here, target_name represents the external IP address of the RNC BAM.

----End

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

Page 37: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 37/204

5.1.4 Remotely Connecting the NodeB LMT PC to the NodeB(Through M2000)

This section describes how to connect the NodeB LMT PC to RAN on the M2000 server in

remote maintenance mode.

Prerequisite

The IP address of the remote NodeB LMT PC is set and it is in the same network segment as

the M2000 server.

Procedure

Step 1 Use an Ethernet cable to connect the Ethernet port of the LMT PC, Ethernet port of the M2000

server, and one Ethernet port of the RAN OM intranet (that is, the RNC BAM external network)

to the LAN switch.

Step 2 On the LMT PC, choose Start > Run, and then run the cmd command in the R un dialog box.

The command window is displayed.

Step 3 Run ping target_name -t and verify the connection between the LMT PC and the communication

gateway. Where, target_name represents the IP address of the M2000 server.

----End

5.1.5 Setting the Route from the NodeB LMT PC to the NodeB

This section describes how to set the route from the LMT PC to the NodeB in remote maintenancemode. The route from the LMT PC to the NodeB must be set. Otherwise, you cannot log in to

the NodeB on the LMT PC.

Procedure

Step 1 On the LMT PC, choose Start > Run, and then run the cmd command in the dialog box. The

command window is displayed.

Step 2 Run ROUTE ADD Networkaddress MASK netmask gatewayaddress in the command

window to add a route from the computer to the gateway.

Set Networkaddress, netmask, and gatewayaddress by referring to Table 5-3.

Table 5-3 Description of route parameters

Parameter Description

 Networkaddress IP address of the NodeB in remote maintenance mode

netmask Subnet mask that is the same as the external subnet mask of RNC

BAM

gatewayaddress External IP address of the BAM

 

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

Page 38: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 38/204

NOTE

l Different NodeBs correspond to different IP addresses.

l The IP address in the same network segment corresponds to the same subnet mask and subnet address

(subnet mask AND IP address).

Step 3 Run ping target_name -t and verify the connection between the LMT PC and the NodeB. Here,

target_name represents the IP address of the NodeB OMIP.

----End

5.1.6 Locally Logging In to the NodeB on the NodeB LMT

This section describes how to locally log on to the NodeB on the LMT.

Prerequisite

The LMT PC is properly connected to the NodeB.

Procedure

Step 1 Select Start > All Programs > Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal > Local Maintenance

Terminal. The User Login dialog box displays.

NOTE

If the LMT is started already, select System > Log Out or click .

Table 5-4 describes the fields in the User Login dialog box.

Table 5-4 Fields in the User Login dialog box

Field Description

User Name Enter the user name of the NodeB. The default user name is admin.

The user name is mandatory and case-sensitive.

Password Enter the password of the NodeB. The default password is NodeB. The

 password consists of 6 to 16 alphanumeric and case-sensitive

characters.

Office Select the name and IP address of the NodeB that is connected to the

LMT. Click to edit the office information. For details, refer to 5.4

Setting the Information About an Office on the NodeB LMT.

When you log in to the NodeB locally, the IP address of the office must

 be the same as that of the NodeB local maintenance channel.

Proxy server Leave this field blank. Ensure that you do not select the check box.

 

Step 2 In the Office area, set IP Address and Office.

Step 3 Enter the user name and password in the dialog box.

Step 4

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

Page 39: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 39/204

Step 5 Click Login to log in to the NodeB.

Step 6 If the Unmatched Version window displays, choose appropriate option according to the needs.

l Download a matched version.

l If you do not need to download a matched version, select Forcibly login using the unmatchedversion. Use Forcible login with caution as it may result in system problems. If you do not

need to download a matched version, select Forcibly login by using the unmatched

version. Use Forcible login with caution as it may result in system problems.

----End

5.1.7 Remotely Logging In to the NodeB LMT (Through RNC BAM)

This section describes how to remotely log on to the NodeB through the RNC BAM.

Prerequisite

l The connections between the LMT PC, the RNC BAM, and the NodeB are normal.

l The route from the NodeB LMT PC to the NodeB is set.

Procedure

Step 1 Select Start > All Programs > Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal > Local Maintenance

Terminal. The User Login dialog box displays.

NOTE

If the LMT is started already, select System > Log Out or click .

Table 5-5 describes the fields in the User Login dialog box.

Table 5-5 Fields in the User Login dialog box

Field Description

User Name Enter the user name of the NodeB. The default user name is admin.

The user name is mandatory and case-sensitive.

Password Enter the password of the NodeB. The default password is NodeB. The

 password consists of 6 to 16 alphanumeric and case-sensitive

characters.

Office Select the name and IP address of the NodeB that is connected to the

LMT. Click to edit the office information. For details, refer to 5.4

Setting the Information About an Office on the NodeB LMT.

When you log in to the NodeB locally, the IP address of the office must

 be the same as that of the NodeB local maintenance channel.

Proxy server Leave this field blank. Ensure that you do not select the check box.

 

Step 2 In the Office area, set IP Address and Office.

Step 3 Enter the user name and password in the dialog box.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

Page 40: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 40/204

Step 4 Click Login to log in to the NodeB.

Step 5 If the Unmatched Version window displays, choose appropriate option according to the needs.

l Download a matched version.

l If there is no need for download a matched version, select Forcibly login by using theunmatched version. Forcible login may lead to unknown problems.

----End

5.1.8 Remotely Logging In to the NodeB LMT (Through M2000)

This section describes how to log on to the NodeB on the M2000. By performing this task, you

can maintain the NodeB through the M2000 server.

Prerequisite

l The active M2000 user has the administration right to the NodeB and a corresponding NEexists.

l LMT computer, M2000, and the NodeB are connected properly.

Context

The LMT log in to the NodeB through M2000 via the following two methods:

l Method 1: Set the M2000 as the default gateway, set the route from the LMT PC to the

 NodeB, and log in to the NodeB.

l Method 2: Log in to the M2000 from the LMT, and then select the NodeB equipment to

 perform maintenance.

Table 5-6 Fields in the User Login dialog box

Field Description

User Name Enter the user name of the M2000. The user name is mandatory and

case-sensitive.

Password Enter the password of the M2000. The password is case-sensitive, and

it should have 6 to 16 digits which must be a combination of alphabets

and numbers.

OfficeClick to edit the office information. For details, refer to 5.4 Settingthe Information About an Office on the NodeB LMT.

l If using method 1, select the name and IP address of the NodeB that

connected to the LMT. The IP address of the office is the IP address

of the NodeB remote maintenance channel.

l If using method 2, select the name and IP address of the M2000

server. The IP address of the office is the IP address of the M2000

server.

Proxy server    l In method 1, the M2000 must be configured as the proxy server.

l In method 2, this does not need to be set.

 

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

Page 41: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 41/204

Procedure

l Method 1:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal > Local

Maintenance Terminal, and the User Login dialog box displays.

For the details in the User Login dialog box, see Table 5-6.

2. Enter the user name and password of the M2000 in the dialog box, and set Office to

the name and IP address of the NodeB that connected to the LMT.

3. Set the proxy server to the M2000.

4. Click Login to log in to the NodeB.

l Method 2:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal > Local

Maintenance Terminal, and the User Login dialog box displays.

For the details in the User Login dialog box, see Table 5-6.

2. Enter the user name and password of the M2000 in the dialog box, and set Office to

the name and IP address of the M2000.

3. Click Login to log in to the M2000.

The NodeB List dialog box displays the NodeB equipment list and the corresponding

IP address under the M2000.

4. Select the NodeB equipment that need to be maintained in the dialog box, and click 

OK  to log in to the NodeB.

5. If the Unmatched Version window displays, choose appropriate option according to

the needs.

–If there is a need to download a matched version, select Download a matchedversion.

– If there is no need to download a matched version, select Forcibly login by using

the unmatched version. Forcible login may lead to unknown problems.

----End

5.2 Setting the Properties of the NodeB LMT

This section describes how to set the properties of the NodeB LMT. Configuration consists of 

the following tasks: setting the office, setting the time-out duration of MML commands, setting

the system lock time, and running batch MML commands.

Procedure

l Select System > System Setting. In the displayed dialog box, click the Terminal tab,

enable automatic locking the system, and then set the system lock time. If no operation is

 performed in the set duration, the terminal will be automatically locked.

l Select System > Office Management to set, modify, or delete office information. For 

details, refer to 5.4 Setting the Information About an Office on the NodeB LMT.

l SelectSystem > Output Window Setting to set output window setting and save the settings

to a file. Table 5-7 lists parameter settings.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

Page 42: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 42/204

Table 5-7 Parameter settings in the Output Window Setting dialog box

Field Description

Properties

Setting

Maximum Output Lines The maximum number of lines that can be

displayed.

Auto scroll to the new

message

This enables you to see the new message at any

time.

Output

Setting

Export To File The default path is installation directory

\client\output\NodeB\ LMT version

\ilmtframe\Maintenance_YY-MM-DD-HH-

MM-SS.txt.

Maximum Amount The total number of commands that can be

delivered to and from the RNC.

Auto Save If this check box is selected, commands andmessages are automatically saved to the

specified files.

Timed Save If this check box is selected, commands and

messages are exported within the scheduled

 period of time.

Start time The start of the scheduled period of time.

End time The end of the scheduled period of time.

 

l Select System > Command Timeout Setting to perform MML command time-out setting.Value range: 20 to 600. Unit: s. The LMT displays the Timeout dialog box if no result is

returned after the time-out duration expires.

l Select System > Batch Commands to run batch MML commands. For details, refer to 6.3

Running NodeB Batch MML Commands.

l Select View > Navigation Tree to display or hide the navigation tree.

l Select View > Output Window to display or hide the output window.

l Select View > Command Window to display or hide the command window.

l Select View > System Toolbar to display or hide the toolbar.

----End

5.3 Changing the Password for Login to the NodeB LMT

This section describes how to change the password for logging in to the NodeB. You can log in

to the NodeB only if the correct password is entered.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Local Maintenance Terminal window, select Authority > Change Password. The

Change Password dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Enter the old and new passwords in the dialog box.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

Page 43: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 43/204

Step 3 Click OK .

----End

5.4 Setting the Information About an Office on the NodeBLMT

This section describes how to set the IP address of the M2000 server or the NodeB.

Context

Typically, one name is used to identify different IP addresses. A NodeB LMT may have different

office information to connect to a specified M2000 server or NodeB.

Procedure

Step 1 Select System > Office Management, and the Office Management dialog box displays.

Table 5-8 Fields in the Office Management dialog box

Field Description

Office The name of NEs to which the NodeB LMT connects. It is a string of 60

characters, and can neither contain the symbols: * : < > | ? \ / " &.

IP Address The IP address of the NEs. It is unique to the Office.

In local maintenance mode, the default IP address of the NodeB is

17.21.2.15.

 NE Type The type of the NE under maintenance: NodeB.

 NE Port The port number of the NEs to which the NodeB LMT connects. By default,

the port number of the normal connection is 6000, and the port number of 

the SSL connection is 6000.

Connect Type Two modes are possible for the connection between the NodeB LMT and

 NEs: Normal Connection and SSL Connection.

Proxy Server Used to connect the NodeB LMT to the NEs. The IP address of the proxy

server can be specified.

Start Local Port The starting local port number when the link is established.

End Local Port The ending local port number of the office when the link is established.

Add You can add other M2000 server or NodeB office information by clicking

Add to display the Add dialog box.

Modify You can modify the office information by selecting an office and clicking

Modify.

Delete You can delete an office by selecting that office and clicking Delete.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

Page 44: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 44/204

Field Description

Import You can import the office information by clicking Import to display the

Open dialog box. Then select the office file that is backed up during the

export. The format of the imported office file is *.zip.

Export You can back up the office information by clicking Export. The Save

dialog box is displayed. Enter a file name, and then specify a path and a file

type.

Find Enter the office information in the Find Office text box, and click Find.

 

Step 2 Click Add, and the Add dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters.

NOTE

If Connect Type is set to SSL Connection, the SSL Options panel is displayed. Specify the protocol version,

algorithm intensity, and authentication mode. Click to hide the SSL Options panel. If you want to have this panel displayed again, click .

Step 3 Click OK . The system returns to Office Management dialog box.

Step 4 Click Close. The settings are complete.

----End

5.5 Locking the NodeB LMTThis section describes how to lock the NodeB LMT to ensure secure operation. Lock the system

to avoid illegal operations when it is not in use.

Context

The NodeB LMT has two lock modes:

l Lock immediately

l Lock by schedule

NOTE

The lock function locks only the interface of the NodeB LMT without disrupting any operations on the

LMT.

Procedurel Lock immediately

1. Select System >Lock , use the shortcut keys Ctrl+Alt+M, or click . The interface

is locked.

l Lock by schedule

1. Select System > System Setting. A System Setting dialog box is displayed.

2. Select Terminal, and set the lock time in the System Setting dialog box.

3. Select Automatically locked and set the time for the automatic locking.

4. Click OK  to complete the settings.

----End

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

Page 45: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 45/204

5.6 Unlocking the NodeB LMT

This section describes how to unlock the LMT. Once the NodeB LMT is locked, you must log

on to it again by entering the correct password.

Context

The NodeB LMT is locked and the Terminal Locked dialog box is displayed.

Procedure

Step 1 Press Ctrl+Alt+U. The Unlock Terminal dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Enter the password, and then click OK  to unlock the LMT.

----End

5.7 Exiting from the NodeB LMT

This section describes how to exit from the NodeB LMT. If you exit the LMT, you will

disconnect the LMT from the NodeB and close the LMT. If you log on to the NodeB through

the M2000 server, you will also disconnect the LMT from the M2000.

Procedure

Step 1 Select System > Exit, or click . A Confirmation dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Click OK .

----End

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 5 Getting Started with the NodeB LMT

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

Page 46: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 46/204

6 Running NodeB MML Commands

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to run Man Machine Language (MML) commands. You may run a

single MML command or batch commands.

6.2 Running a Single NodeB MML Command

This section describes how to run a single NodeB MML command.

6.3 Running NodeB Batch MML Commands

This section describes how to run NodeB batch MML commands. Running batch MML

commands involves adding a series of commands into a batch file, and then running the file to

 perform a function or an operation.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 6 Running NodeB MML Commands

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

Page 47: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 47/204

6.1 Introduction to NodeB MML Commands

This section describes the functions, formats, interfaces, and types of NodeB MML commands.

Functions

You can operate and maintain the entire NodeB by using the MML commands. The MML

commands enable you to perform the following operations:

l System Management

l Equipment Maintenance

l Iub interface Management

l Local cell Management

l

Alarm Management

Format

All the MML commands are in the format of "Command Word: Parameter Name=Value;".

The command word is mandatory, whereas the parameter name and value are not.

l An example of an MML command with a command word and parameters: SET

ALMSHLD: AID=10015, SHLDFLG=UNSHIELDED;

l An example of an MML command with only a command word: LST VER:;

InterfaceIn the Local Maintenance Terminal window, select View > Command Window, as shown

in Figure 6-1.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 6 Running NodeB MML Commands

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

Page 48: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 48/204

Figure 6-1 MML client dialog box

 

Types

The MML command format is Action + Object. For details, refer to Table 6-1.

Table 6-1 Types of MML commands

Action Meaning  

ACT Activate

ADD Add

BLK Block  

DLD Download

DSP Display dynamic information

LST List static data

MOD Modify

RMV Remove

RST Reset

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 6 Running NodeB MML Commands

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

Page 49: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 49/204

Action Meaning  

SET Set

STP Stop

STR Start

UBL Unblock  

ULD Upload

SCN Scan

CLB Calibrate

 

6.2 Running a Single NodeB MML CommandThis section describes how to run a single NodeB MML command.

Procedure

l Entering an MML command in the Command Input box:

1. Enter an MML command in the Command Input box.

2. Press ENTER  or click . The parameter show area displays the parameters of this

command.

3. Enter parameters in the parameter show area.

4. Press F9 or click to run this command. The common maintenance pane displays

the execution result.

l Selecting a command in the History command box:

1. Select a command in the History command box. Press F8 for the next command and

F7 for the previous command.

The parameter show area displays parameters of this command.

2. Modify the values of parameters in the parameter show area.

3. Press F9 or click to run this command.

The common maintenance pane displays the execution result.

l Copying an MML command script into the Command Input area:

1. Copy an MML command script with complete parameters into the Command

Input box.

2. Press F9 or click to run this command.

The common maintenance pane displays the execution result.

l Click the MML Command navigation tree in the navigation pane:

1. Double-click on an MML Command from navigation tree.

2. Enter parameter values in the parameter show area.

3. Press F9 or click to run this command.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 6 Running NodeB MML Commands

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

Page 50: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 50/204

The common maintenance pane displays the execution result.

----End

6.3 Running NodeB Batch MML CommandsThis section describes how to run NodeB batch MML commands. Running batch MML

commands involves adding a series of commands into a batch file, and then running the file to

 perform a function or an operation.

Prerequisite

Batch MML command files are created.

Context

You can run batch MML commands in either of the following ways:

l Run batch MML commands by schedule

l Run batch MML commands immediately

The batch file (also referred to as the data script file) is a file in .txt format. It stores a group of 

commands that can perform a common function or a specific task. Batch files permit you to run

several commands at once, rather than entering the commands one by one.

Batch MML command files can be created in any of the following three ways:

l Create a file in .txt format and write the commands into the file. Ensure to write one

command on each line.

l Copy the information in the History Command box in the output pane and save it in a

 blank file in .txt format.

l Select System > Save Input Commands to save the used commands.

Procedure

l To run batch MML commands immediately, perform the following steps:

1. Select System > Batch Commands, or press Ctrl+E. A MML Batch Processing

window is displayed. Click the Immediate Batch Commands tab, as shown in Figure

6-2.

Figure 6-2 Immediate Batch Command tab page

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 6 Running NodeB MML Commands

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

Page 51: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 51/204

 

2. Click New in Immediate Batch Command, enter batch command in Input Box, or 

click Open to select a pre-edited batch command file.

3. Set the parameters.

4. Click Go.

l To run batch MML commands by scheduled, perform the following steps:

1. Select System > Batch Commands, or press Ctrl+E. A MML Batch Processing

window is displayed. Click the Timing Batch Command tab, as shown in Figure

6-3.

Figure 6-3 Timing Batch Command tab page

 

2. Click the Add, the Add Batch Task  dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure

6-4.

Figure 6-4 Add Batch Task dialog box

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 6 Running NodeB MML Commands

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

Page 52: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 52/204

 

3. Click beside Batch File, and select the batch file.

4. Click beside Execute Time to set executing time.

5. Click OK .

CAUTION

Ensure that the MML Batch window is open. Otherwise, the timed task is deleted.

----End

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 6 Running NodeB MML Commands

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

Page 53: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 53/204

7 Managing NodeB Alarms

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to manage NodeB alarms. You can set properties for the alarm

management system, query alarms and resolve problems associated with them.

7.1 Concepts Related to NodeB Alarm Management

Users need to learn about NodeB alarms before managing them. This section describes concepts

related to NodeB alarms, including alarm types, alarm logs, alarm severity, and alarm

classification based on network management.

7.2 Setting the Properties of the NodeB Alarm Management System

This section describes how to set the properties of the NodeB management system including the

 properties of alarm query window, alarm prompt, and alarm real-time print.

7.3 Handling NodeB Alarms

This section describes how to manage NodeB alarms. Instructions are provided to browse alarm

lists, query alarm logs, manually recover alarms, save alarm information, manually print alarm

information, query alarm handling suggestions, shield alarms, clear alarms, and refresh the alarm

window.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 7 Managing NodeB Alarms

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

Page 54: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 54/204

7.1 Concepts Related to NodeB Alarm Management

Users need to learn about NodeB alarms before managing them. This section describes concepts

related to NodeB alarms, including alarm types, alarm logs, alarm severity, and alarm

classification based on network management.

7.1.1 Alarm Types

This section describes the alarm types including fault alarms and event alarms.

Table 7-1 describes the alarm types.

Table 7-1 Fault alarms and event alarms

Alarm Types Description

Fault alarms A fault alarm is caused by a hardware malfunction or an anomaly of a

major function. Fault alarms are of higher severity than event alarms.

Event alarms An event alarm indicates a predefined event that happens during the

running of the devices. The alarm represents an instantaneous status of 

the system which may not be a fault. Some event alarms are generated

repeatedly and regularly. Event alarms are not categorized as active or 

recovery alarms.

 

Fault alarms are categorized as either active or recovery alarms.

l If the fault is cleared, the status of the alarm changes to Recovery, and the alarm is called

a recovery alarm.

l If the fault persists, the status of the alarm remains Active, and the alarm is called an active

alarm.

For example, when congestion occurs in a cell, the system reports a fault alarm of cell

congestion. Before the congestion is cleared, the alarm remains an active one. After the

congestion is cleared, the alarm becomes a recovery one.

NOTE

The record of a recovery alarm is stored in the BAM database and can be queried.

7.1.2 Alarm Logs

The alarm log contains detailed information about each alarm generated by the system.

You can query alarm logs on the NodeB. For more information, refer to 7.3.2 Querying Alarm

Logs.

7.1.3 Alarm Severity

This section describes the alarm severity. It indicates the seriousness of a fault. The alarm severity

for both fault alarms and event alarms can be categorized into four levels: critical, major, minor,and warning.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 7 Managing NodeB Alarms

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

Page 55: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 55/204

Table 7-2 describes the four severity levels.

Table 7-2 Alarm severity levels

AlarmSeverity

Definition Solution

Critical Reports faults that affect the services provided by

the system. These alarms need immediate attention

even during off-work periods. Critical alarms can

result in service outage.

Resolve faults

immediately to avoid

service outage.

Major Reports faults that affect the Quality of Service

(QoS). These alarms need attention during

working hours and may impact the performance of 

equipment or resources.

Handle the faults as

needed. Note the

system may fail to

 perform some major 

functions.

Minor Reports faults that are not serious enough to affect

the QoS. Resolve alarms as needed.

Clear faults as

needed.

Warning Reports faults that potentially threaten the system

services. Resolve alarms as needed.

Determine the

running state of the

system.

 

7.1.4 Alarm Classification Based on Network Management

 NodeB alarms are classified by network management.

 NodeB alarms can be categorized into the following types:

l Power system alarms: the alarms on the power system (for example, -48 V DC)

l Environment system alarms: the alarms on equipment room environment such as the

temperature, the humidity, and the door control

l Signaling system alarms: the alarms on channel associated signaling (SS1) and common

channel signaling (SS7)

l Trunk system alarms: the alarms on trunk circuits and trunk boards

l Hardware system alarms: the alarms on board parts such as the clock and CPU

l Software system alarms: the alarms on software

l System running alarms: the alarms on system running processes

l Communication system alarms: the alarms on communication systems

l QoS alarms: the alarms on QoS

7.2 Setting the Properties of the NodeB Alarm ManagementSystem

This section describes how to set the properties of the NodeB management system including the properties of alarm query window, alarm prompt, and alarm real-time print.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 7 Managing NodeB Alarms

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

Page 56: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 56/204

7.2.1 Setting the Properties of the NodeB Alarm Query Window

This section describes how to set the properties of the NodeB alarm query window. You can

customize the alarm color of each alarm severity, set the playing duration of fault alarm sounds,

and set the initial and maximum display numbers of alarm records.

Procedure

Step 1 Select Fault Management > Alarm Customization. The Alarm Customization dialog box is

displayed.

Table 7-3 describes the fields in the Alarm Customization dialog box.

Table 7-3 Fields in the Alarm Customization dialog box

Field Description

Alarm Color Critical Fault Set a color for critical faults.

Major Fault Set a color for major faults.

Minor Fault Set a color for minor faults.

Warning Fault Set a color for warning faults.

Recovery Alarm Set a color for recovery faults.

Event Set a color for events.

Fault Alarm Sound Play by Time(s) Set the time length for playing the alarm

sound. When the time runs out, the

alarm sound automatically stops.

Circularly Play Play the alarm sound repeatedly instead

of playing for a period of time. For 

example, when a major alarm is

reported, the corresponding alarm

sound is repeatedly played.

Critical Set the sound duration for critical

alarms. By selecting the corresponding

check box, the fault alarm sound is

enabled at the critical severity level.

Major Set the sound duration for major alarms.

By selecting the corresponding check 

 box, the fault alarm sound is enabled at

the major severity level.

Minor Set the sound duration for minor alarms.

By selecting the corresponding check 

 box, the fault alarm sound is enabled at

the minor severity level.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 7 Managing NodeB Alarms

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

Page 57: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 57/204

Field Description

Warning Set the sound duration for warning

alarms. By selecting the corresponding

check box, the fault alarm sound is

enabled at the warning severity level.

Initial Display Amount Alarm number displayed the first time

this dialog box is opened.

Max. Display Amount Maximum number of alarms displayed

in the fault alarm and event alarm

tables.

ToolTips   l The values are Enable or Disable.

This field is set to Enable by default.

l If this function is enabled, detailed

alarm information is displayedwhen you point to an alarm record

in the Alarm Browse dialog box

and Query Alarm Log dialog box.

 

Step 2 Set the properties of the alarm query window as required.

NOTE

l If you click Default, all the settings are restored to the default state.

l To enable fault alarm sounds, an alarm severity must be selected and the Alarm Browse window is

open.

l If multiple alarm severities are selected, the alarm sound of higher severity alarms is given preference.

l If the Alarm Browse window is open and alarm sounds are repeatedly played, you can select Play by

Time(s) and then set the play time. The setting takes effect for subsequent alarms.

l If an alarm sound is repeatedly played, the sound will only stop when all the alarms of that severity are

cleared.

l The alarm sounds take effect only for fault alarms. The sounds are from the audio adapter instead of 

the alarm box.

Step 3 Click OK .

----End

7.2.2 Setting NodeB Alarm Prompt

This section describes how to set NodeB alarm prompts.

Context

When there are alarms, the NodeB alarm service manager icon blinks.

Procedure

Step 1 Select Fault Management > Fault Alarm Prompt. An alarm service manager icon isdisplayed in the task area.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 7 Managing NodeB Alarms

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

Page 58: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 58/204

Step 2 Right-click the NodeB Alarm Service Manager to perform the operations listed in the following

table.

Operation Description

Stop Current Prompt Select this to stop the Alarm Service Manager  icon blinking.

Fault Alarm Prompt If select this option, the NodeB Alarm Service

Manager icon blinks when there are alarms.

Browse Alarm Select this to display the reported alarm.

 

----End

7.2.3 Setting the Preferences for Printing Alarms in Real Time

This section describes how to set the preferences for printing of alarms. Only real-time alarms

that meet requirements are printed.

Prerequisite

The LMT PC is connected to a printer.

Procedure

Step 1 Select Fault Management > Alarm Realtime Print Set. The Alarm Realtime Print Set dialog

 box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1 Setting alarm real-time print

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 7 Managing NodeB Alarms

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

Page 59: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 59/204

 

Step 2 Set the print requirements.

Step 3 Click OK .

----End

7.3 Handling NodeB Alarms

This section describes how to manage NodeB alarms. Instructions are provided to browse alarm

lists, query alarm logs, manually recover alarms, save alarm information, manually print alarm

information, query alarm handling suggestions, shield alarms, clear alarms, and refresh the alarm

window.

7.3.1 Browsing Alarms

This section describes how to browse the fault and event alarms that are sent to the LMT and

displayed in the Browse Alarm window in real time. It is useful for reviewing the operating

status of the system.

Procedure

Step 1 Select Fault Management > Browse Alarm. A Browse Alarm window is displayed.

Step 2 To learn the details about an alarm, double-click it. The Alarm Detailed Information dialog

 box is displayed.

Step 3 Click a corresponding button according to the need.

Click Previous or 

Next to check the details of the previous or next alarm.

Step 4 Click Close to close the dialog box.

----End

7.3.2 Querying Alarm LogsThis section describes how to query alarm logs by specific search conditions. You can also obtain

a history of running records of the equipment.

Procedure

l GUI mode

1. Select Fault Management > Query Alarm Log, or click . A Query Alarm

Log dialog box is displayed.

Set general conditions for alarm query in the General Option tab page. Table 7-4describes the fields in this page.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 7 Managing NodeB Alarms

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

Page 60: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 60/204

Table 7-4 Fields in the General Option tab page

Field Description

Alarm Type This enables you to specify the alarm types. Value range:

Event, Fault Recovered, and Fault Unrecovered. Bydefault, all types are selected.

Alarm Severity This enables you to specify the alarm severity types to

query. Value range: Critical, Major, Minor, and Warning.

By default, all types are selected.

Alarm Time This enables you to specify a time range to query alarms.

Rules for time specifying:

l If you specify a start time without a start date, the

system uses the seventh day before the current day as

the start date.

l If you specify an end time without an end date, the

system uses the current date as the end date.

Return Amount This enables you to specify the number of records that are

displayed.

 

In the Detailed Option tab page, set the following parameters for querying alarms:

alarm serial number, alarm ID, and event type.

Table 7-5 describes the fields in the Detailed Option tab page.

Table 7-5 Fields in the Detailed Option tab page

Field Description

Event Type This enables you to specify event types. By default, all types

are selected.

Alarm ID This enables you to specify an alarm ID range.

Alarm Serial No. This enables you to specify a range of the alarm serial

number.

Module ID Not supported on the NodeB.

 

In the Physical Option tab page, set the following parameters for querying alarms:

subrack number, slot number, and board place.

Table 7-6 describes the fields in the Physical Option tab page.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 7 Managing NodeB Alarms

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

Page 61: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 61/204

Table 7-6 Fields in the Physical Option tab page

Field Description

Cabinet No. This enables you to specify a cabinet.

Subrack No. This enables you to specify a subrack.

Slot No. This enables you to specify a slot.

Board Place Not supported on the NodeB.

Board Type This enables you to specify a board type.

 

2. Set the search conditions as required.

3. Click OK . The Query Alarm Log window is displayed.

4. View the alarm logs in the window.

5. Double-click an alarm record to obtain detailed information. The Alarm Detailed

Information dialog box is displayed.

6. Close the window.

l MML mode

Run the command LST ALMLOG to query the alarm log.

----End

7.3.3 Manually Recovering an Alarm

This section describes how to manually set a cleared alarm.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Browse Alarm window or the Query Alarm Log window, select an alarm report.

Step 2 Right-click the alarm report.

A shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Select Manually Recover Alarm from the shortcut menu.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click Yes.

The selected alarm is recovered and the color of the alarm changes.

----End

7.3.4 Saving the Information of a NodeB Alarm

This section describes how to save information of a NodeB alarm. You can save part or all of 

the alarm records displayed in the Alarm Browse window or Query Alarm Log dialog box as

files in .txt, .htm, or .csv formats.

Context

A saved file has the following information: Serial No., Alarm Name, Alarm Severity, Raised/Clear Time, Location Info, Alarm ID, Module ID, Event Type, Alarm Type and NE Name.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 7 Managing NodeB Alarms

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

Page 62: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 62/204

Procedure

Step 1 Save all or part of the alarm records displayed in the Alarm Browse window or Query Alarm

Log dialog box.

The Save dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Right-click the alarm you would like to save, and select Save Selected Alarms or Save All

Alarms from the shortcut menu.

Step 3 Enter a file name and specify a path and a file type.

NOTE

l The default path to save the alarm record is installation directory\client\output\NodeB\ version

\alarm.

l The default file name is in the format of ALM-YY-MM-DD-HH-MM-SS.txt. For example, the file

name ALM-05-11-07-15-42-37.txt indicates that this file is saved at 15:42:37 on November 7, 2005.

Step 4 Click Save.

----End

7.3.5 Manually Printing Alarm Information

This section describes how to print a part or all of the alarm records in the Alarm Browse window

or the Query Alarm Log window.

Prerequisite

The LMT is connected to a printer.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Alarm Browse window or the Query Alarm Log window:

l To print all alarms, right-click in the window and choose Print All Alarms from the shortcut

menu.

l To print selected alarm records, select the records, right-click, and select Print Selected

Alarms.

The Print dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Set the print requirements.

Step 3 Click Print.

----End

7.3.6 Querying Alarm Handling Suggestions

This section describes how to query alarm handling suggestions. The LMT provides detailed

help information for every alarm.

Context

The LMT provides detailed help information for every alarm, which includes:

l Alarm meaning

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 7 Managing NodeB Alarms

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

Page 63: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 63/204

l Impact on system

l System action

l Alarm handling

Procedure

Step 1 In the Browse Alarm window or the Query Alarm Log window, double-click an alarm. The

Alarm Detailed Information dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 In the Alarm Detailed Information dialog box, click F1. The online help window is displayed.

Step 3 Check the information.

----End

7.3.7 Shielding NodeB Alarms

This section describes how to shield an alarm. Shielding an alarm indicates that the NodeB

neither saves that alarm nor reports it to the LMT.

Context

An unshielded NodeB alarm means that the NodeB saves that alarm and reports it to the LMT.

You can query the unshielded alarm.

NOTE

When shielding an alarm that has already been reported:

l It will not shield the alarm report already reported. It will shield the next report of the alarm.

l The NodeB recovers the alarm and the alarm is displayed as recovered.

Procedure

l GUI mode

1. Select Fault Management > Query Alarm Configuration. The Query Alarm

Configuration dialog box is displayed.

Table 7-7 describes the fields in the Query Alarm Configuration dialog box.

Table 7-7 Fields in the Query Alarm Configuration dialog box

Field Description

Alarm ID This enables you to specify an alarm ID range.

Alarm Severity This enables you to specify one or multiple alarm severities:

Critical, Major, Minor, and Warning.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 7 Managing NodeB Alarms

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

Page 64: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 64/204

Field Description

Modification Flag This enables you to specify whether you want to query the

alarms with modification flag. Value range: Modified,

Unmodified, or All.

Modified means that the configuration information of the

alarms has been changed. If Alarm Severity, Shield Flag, or 

To Alarmbox Flag is modified, the modification flag of the

alarm is displayed.

The NodeB does not support modifying To Alarmbox Flag.

Therefore, if Shield Flag of an alarm is modified, its

modification flag is modified.

Shield Flag This enables you to specify whether you want to query the

alarms with shield flag. Value range: Shielded, Unshielded,

or All.

All means that you can query all the alarms including shielded

and unshielded alarms.

To Alarm Box

Flag

 NodeB dose not support this function.

Return Amount This enables you to specify the number of records that are

displayed.

 

2. Set the search conditions in the dialog box.

3. Click OK . The Query Alarm Configuration window is displayed with the query

result.

4. Select an alarm record to be modified in the window. Right-click the alarm record and

select Modify Alarm Configuration on the shortcut menu. The Modify Alarm

Configuration dialog box is displayed.

Table 7-8 describes the fields in the Modify Alarm Configuration dialog box.

Table 7-8 Fields in the Modify Alarm Configuration dialog box

Field Description

Alarm ID This item is unavailable for the NodeB.

Alarm Severity This allows you to modify alarm severity. Value range:

Critical, Major, Minor, and Warning.

Shield Flag This enables you to specify whether you want to query

the alarms with a shield flag. Value range: Shielded or 

Unshielded.

To Alarm Box Flag NodeB dose not support this function.

 

5. Modify Shield Flag in the dialog box.

6. Click OK . The modification is complete.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 7 Managing NodeB Alarms

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

Page 65: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 65/204

l MML mode

Run the command SET ALMSHLD to set alarm shielding flag.

----End

7.3.8 Clearing the Alarms

This section describes how to clear the recovered alarms when browsing or querying alarms.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click in the Alarm Browse window or Query Alarm Log window. The shortcut menu

is displayed.

Step 2 Select the operation from the shortcut menu as needed.

Operation Description

Clear All Recovery Alarms All recovered alarms are cleared from the window.

This function is applied to the Fault Alarm Browse

window and Query Alarm Log window.

Clear Active Window All recovered alarms in the active window are cleared.

This function is applied to the Fault Alarm Browse

window and Event Alarm Browse window.

Clear Selected Recovery Alarms The recovered alarms that you select are cleared from the

window.

This function is applied to Query Alarm Log window.

----End

7.3.9 Refreshing the Alarm Window

This section describes how to manually refresh the alarm window to update the alarm

information.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click in the Fault Alarm Browse pane or Query Alarm Log window. The shortcut menu

is displayed.

Step 2 Select Manually Refresh.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 7 Managing NodeB Alarms

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

Page 66: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 66/204

NOTE

l In the Fault Alarm Browse pane, the alarms are displayed in real time. Therefore, the cleared alarms

are no longer displayed in the Alarm Browse window after you manually refresh the window.

l In the Query Alarm Log window, the alarms are not displayed in real time. The alarms are displayed

according to the original query conditions after the window is manually refreshed.

----End

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 7 Managing NodeB Alarms

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

Page 67: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 67/204

8 Managing NodeB Equipment

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to manage the NodeB and related boards. The LMT provides the

interface of the device panel and physical topology for the routine maintenance of the NodeB.

8.1 Operating the NodeB Device Panel

This section includes instructions for operating the NodeB device panel.

8.2 Using the Physical Topology

This section includes instructions for using the physical topology to set device properties and

query current status of the device.

8.3 NodeB-Level Operations

This section presents the NodeB-level operations, which includes querying active version and

software version, and resetting the NodeB.

8.4 NodeB Board-Level Operations

This section describes the NodeB board-level maintenance and operations in GUI mode or MML

mode.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

Page 68: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 68/204

8.1 Operating the NodeB Device PanelThis section includes instructions for operating the NodeB device panel.

8.1.1 Introduction to the NodeB Device Panel

The NodeB device panel provides multiple ways to maintain the device. Besides MML

commands, the GUI-based device panel simplifies and the information of virtual cabinets can

 be displayed,visualize the operation and maintenance of the device.

Functions of the Device Panel

The device panel provides graphic user interface according to the actual structure of the NodeB.

In the device panel, select a board in position and right-click the board to display a shortcut menu

with all the available operations. For detailed operations on NodeB boards, see 8.4 NodeBBoard-Level Operations.

Interface of the Device Panel

The panel automatically refreshes to display the board status in real time. Figure 8-1shows the

interface of the device panel for macro NodeBs.

NOTE

This example is for reference only. The actual layout and appearance maybe different.

Figure 8-1 An example of the Device Panel interface

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

Page 69: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 69/204

 

The elements of the Device Panel interface are described in Table 8-1.

Table 8-1 Elements in the Physical Topology window

No. Field Description

1 Device panel The hardware configuration information and realtime status

of boards in the cabinet are displayed in the device panel,

according to the information reported from the NodeB. In

addition, the operations related to the NodeB can be

 performed on the device panel.

2 Legend The legend is a color reference for boards and cables on the

device panel, which lists the meanings of each color. Each

color represents a specific status of the board.

3 Failure Bar The failure bar displays active alarms on the board in real

time.

 

NOTE

l If the total length of the alarm information exceeds the frame capacity, the failure bar scrolls the

display of the information in cycle.

l Alarm information stops scrolling when the cursor moved to the failure bar.

8.1.2 Starting the NodeB Device PanelThis describes how to start the NodeB device panel to operate and maintain the boards in position.

Prerequisite

l The LMT has logged in to the NodeB successfully.

Context

Start the device panel before operating and managing the macro NodeB.

Procedure

l GUI mode:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Device

Panel tab.

2. Select Device Management > Cabinet Name. The device panel is displayed.

----End

8.1.3 Showing or Hiding the Legend on the NodeB Device Panel

This section includes instructions for showing or hiding color reference on the NodeB device panel.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

Page 70: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 70/204

Prerequisite

l The LMT have logged in to the NodeB successfully.

l The device panel is started.

Context

You can make a preliminary decision according to the board status by viewing the color of each

 board.

Procedure

l Click at the upper-right corner of the device panel to hide the color reference window

on the device panel.

l Click at the upper-right corner of the device panel to show the color reference window

on the device panel.

----End

8.1.4 Showing or Hiding the Failure Bar on the NodeB Device Panel

The failure bar displays active alarms in real time.

Prerequisite

l The LMT have logged in to the NodeB.

l The device panel is started.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click on the outside edge area of the subrack.

A shortcut menu displays.

Step 2 Select Show Failure Bar or Hide Failure Bar from the shortcut menu.

NOTE

l By default, the failure bar is displayed if there is an active alarm.

l If there is no active alarm, the failure bar is not displayed, and the Show Failure Bar option is not

available.

----End

Result

The active alarms related to the current device are displayed in the failure bar.

8.2 Using the Physical Topology

This section includes instructions for using the physical topology to set device properties and

query current status of the device.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

Page 71: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 71/204

8.2.1 Introduction to Physical Topology

The topology management function of the LMT provides a man-machine interface, which uses

a physical topology to show messages reported by NEs.

Functions of the Physical Topology

The physical topology allows you to:

l Map equipment nodes, device status, and connection between the nodes.

l Set and query the current status of the devices.

Physical Topology Window

The physical topology window consists of the toolbar, physical topology, and legend. As shown

in Figure 8-2.

Figure 8-2 Physical topology window

 

Table 8-2 describes the elements in the physical topology window.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

Page 72: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 72/204

Table 8-2 Description of the physical topology window

Number Field Description

1 Toolbar The toolbar displays buttons of various functions. You can

use these buttons to perform basic operations on thetopology. Table 8-3 lists the functions of these buttons.

2 Physical

Topology

Based on the information reported by NEs, the physical

topology displays the configuration and connection status

 between the RRU and the BBU or the basic cabinet. You

can use the physical topology to perform operations on the

 NodeB board.

The physical topology displays according to the

configuration of the on-site NEs.

3 Legend In the physical topology, each board or cable has an

indication color to note the current board status andconnections between boards.

 

Table 8-3 Description of the toolbar button function

Function Description

Selection Interactor After clicking this function button, hold the left mouse button while

moving the mouse and then release the mouse button to select nodes

in an area.

Pan Interactor After clicking this function button, hold the left mouse button andmove the mouse to move the topology.

Zoom In Enlarge the display scale of the topology view.

Zoom Out Narrow the display scale of the topology view.

Zoom on a Rectangle After clicking this function button, hold the left mouse button to

enlarge the display scale of the selected area.

Zoom Back Restore the display scale to the default setting.

Airscape Click this function button to display the Airscape dialog box, which

shows the operations in the topology view synchronously.

Select Floor Select the floor and load its topology in the Select Floor dialog box.

Set Floor Background Select a local image and set it to the background of the display

interface.

This function is not available in Whole Building Mode.

Delete Current

Background

Delete the current background image and restore it to the last setting.

This function is not available in Whole Building Mode.

Refresh Refresh the topology.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

Page 73: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 73/204

Function Description

Save Devices Position Click this function button to display the Confirm dialog box and

click Yes to save the current position of the devices.

 

NOTE

The modification of the topology nodes position can be classified into two types:

l When the modification of the nodes position is on the same floor, move the mouse to move the node,

and click Save Devices Position.

l When the modification of the nodes position is not on the same floor, do not move the mouse to move

the node. You can right-click the node and set the floor and position.

8.2.2 Starting the Physical Topology

This section includes instructions to start the physical topology in order to query the current

status of the device.

Prerequisite

l The LMT has logged in to the NodeB successfully.

l Ensure the RRU is configured.

Context

For macro NodeBs, the RRU physical topology can be started only when the RRU is configured.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane, click the Maintenance tab.

Step 2 Double-click Topology Management > RRU Physical Topology. The physical topology is

displayed.

----End

8.2.3 Showing or Hiding the Legend of the Physical Topology

This section includes instructions to show and hide color reference of the physical topology on

the device panel.

Prerequisite

l The LMT have logged in to the NodeB successfully.

l The physical topology is started. For its start method, refer to 8.2.2 Starting the Physical

Topology.

Context

Show or hide the legend expands the display area of the physical topology.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

Page 74: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 74/204

Procedure

l Click to show the legend of the device panel.

l Click to hide the legend of the device panel.

----End

8.3 NodeB-Level Operations

This section presents the NodeB-level operations, which includes querying active version and

software version, and resetting the NodeB.

8.3.1 Querying the Active Version of the NodeB

This presents the procedure to query the active version of the NodeB, which helps to learn the

version of the running NodeB.

Prerequisite

LMT has logged into the NodeB.

Context

l The NodeB version information consists of active software version information, active

software version status, hardware version, and active BootROM version.

l When querying a Macro NodeB, this function only applies to the active WMPT.

l When querying a Distributed NodeB, this function only applies to the active WMPT on the

BBU.

Procedure

l GUI mode:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Device

Panel tab.

2. Select Device Management > Cabinet Name. The NodeB device panel is displayed.

3. Select the active WMPT on the device panel, and right-click the board. The shortcut

menu is displayed.

4. Select List NodeB Running Version. The Result Information dialog box is

displayed, listing the version information.

l MML mode:

Run the command LST VER .

----End

8.3.2 Querying the Software Version of the NodeB

This presents the procedure to query the software version information of a Macro NodeB or adistributed NodeB.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

Page 75: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 75/204

Prerequisite

The LMT has logged in to the NodeB successfully.

Contextl Querying the software version means listing the versions of the NE software and patch.

The version information includes version number, version status (available or not), and

whether it is the current version.

l The software version stored on the NodeB consists of the following items:

– Software version of the active directory

– Software version of the standby directory

– Version of the active patch directory

– Version of the hot patch directory

lYou can check the NodeB upgrade history by querying the software version.

l When querying a Macro NodeB, this function only applies to the active WMPT.

l When querying a Distributed NodeB, this function only applies to the active WMPT on the

BBU.

Procedure

l GUI mode:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Device

Panel tab.

2. Select Device Management > Cabinet Name. The device panel is displayed.

3. Select the active WMPT on the device panel, and right-click the board. The shortcut

menu is displayed.

4. Select List NodeB Software Version. The Result Information dialog box is

displayed, listing the version information about the NodeB software and patches.

l MML mode:

Run the command LST SOFTWARE.

----End

8.3.3 Resetting the NodeB

This section includes instructions to reset a Macro NodeB or a distributed NodeB.

Context

The NodeB needs be reset after updating some system data or downloading the data

configuration file. When a NodeB malfunctions, it must be reset to restore the system to the

default settings.

l Resetting the WMPT board of a Macro NodeB will reset all boards on the Macro NodeB,

and reset the entire macro NodeB.

l

Resetting the WMPT on the BBU of the distributed NodeB will reset the BBU, and resetthe entire distributed NodeB.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

Page 76: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 76/204

CAUTION

l Resetting the NodeB leads to the resetting of all the boards in the NodeB. At the same time,

the services carried by the NodeB are disrupted. The NodeB needs be restarted.l When the multi-mode base station works in co-module mode, resetting the NodeB interrupts

services of the other mode.

l When the multi-mode base station supports co-transmission through ports on a board working

in UMTS mode, resetting the NodeB interrupts services of the other mode.

Procedure

l GUI mode:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Device

Panel tab.

2. Select Device Management > Cabinet Name. The device panel is displayed.

3. Select the WMPT on the device panel, and right-click the board. A shortcut menu is

displayed.

4. Select Reset Board, and click Yes in the confirmation dialog box appeared.

l MML mode:

Run the command RST NODEB.

----End

Result

CAUTION

After the reset, the LMT displays the result. If the reset is successful, the LMT is disconnected

from the NodeB. You need to log in to the LMT again to connect to the NodeB.

8.4 NodeB Board-Level Operations

This section describes the NodeB board-level maintenance and operations in GUI mode or MML

mode.

8.4.1 Introduction to NodeB Board-Oriented Operations

Operations of board management vary according to the NodeB type.

Table 8-4 describes the operations related to boards.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

Page 77: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 77/204

Table 8-4 Operations related to boards

NodeBType

Operation Board

Macro NodeB:

Resetting a board All boards except the NCMU and the NPMU

Querying the version of a board

Querying active board alarms

Querying the status of a board

Querying the manufacturing

information of a board

Querying the CPU usage of a board

Blocking/unblocking a board WBBP, WRFU, and RRU

Querying the E1/T1 link status WMPT/UTRP

Querying the E1/T1 working mode

Querying the NodeB software version WMPT

Querying the active NodeB version

Querying the current clock status

Querying the STM-1 State UTRP

Querying the STM-1 Working Mode

Querying the Device Sequence ID RRU

Adding a sector 

Modifying the transmit power 

Set Floor and Position

Open Related Shelf 

Distributed

 NodeB

Resetting a board All boards

Displaying the board version

Querying active board alarms

Displaying the board status

Querying the manufacturing

information of a board

Querying the CPU usage of a board

Blocking/unblocking a board WBBP, WRFU, and RRU

Querying the E1/T1 link status WMPT/UTRP

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

Page 78: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 78/204

NodeBType

Operation Board

Querying the E1/T1 working mode

Querying the NodeB software version WMPT

Querying the active NodeB version

Querying the current clock status

Querying the STM-1 State UTRP

Querying the STM-1 Working Mode

Querying the Device Sequence ID RRU/BBU

Adding a sector 

Modifying the transmit power 

Set Floor and Position

Open Related Shelf 

 

8.4.2 Querying the State of a NodeB Board

This section includes instructions to query the start of a board on a Macro NodeB or a Distributed

 NodeB.

Prerequisite

You have logged in to the NodeB LMT.

Context

The state of a board can be active or standby. You can monitor the NodeB running status by

querying the running status of a board.

Table 8-5 describes the board status.

Table 8-5 Board status

Type BoardStatus

Description Remarks

Active/

Standby

status

Active Indicates that the board is active. Active/Standby status is only

applied to the WMPT and

UTRP. Active/Standby status

of the other boards is None.

Standby Indicates that the board is standby.

 None Indicates that the active or standby

status is not applicable to this

 board.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

Page 79: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 79/204

Page 80: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 80/204

NOTE

You can also query the board status by checking the board color. For details, refer to 8.1.1

Introduction to the NodeB Device Panel.

Distributed NodeB RRU:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the

Maintenance tab.

2. Double-click Topology Management > RRU Physical Topology. The physical

topology is displayed.

3. Select and right-click the RRU to be queried. The shortcut menu is displayed.

4. Select Display Board Status. A dialog box is displayed, showing the running status

of that board.

l MML mode:

Run DSP BRD.

----End

8.4.3 Querying Active Alarms of NodeB Boards

This section includes instructions to query the active alarms of a NodeB board.

Context

l This procedure is used to determine the current state of the board, enabling you to locate

and clear faults on the board.

l When a distributed NodeB is queried, the procedures for RRU and BBU are different.

Procedure

l GUI mode:

Macro NodeB board and Distributed NodeB BBU board:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Device

Panel tab.

2. Select Device Management > Main Cabinet. The NodeB device panel is displayed.

3. Select the board to be queried on the device panel.

4. Right-click the board. The shortcut menu is displayed.5. Select Query Active Alarms. A dialog box is displayed, showing the fault alarms of 

the board that have not cleared.

Distributed NodeB RRU:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the

Maintenance tab.

2. Double-click Topology Management > RRU Physical Topology. The physical

topology is displayed.

3. Select and right-click the RRU to be queried. The shortcut menu is displayed.

4. Select Query Active Alarms. A dialog box is displayed, showing the fault alarms of the board that are not cleared.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

Page 81: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 81/204

l MML mode

Run the command LST ALMAF.

----End

8.4.4 Querying the Version of a NodeB Board

This section includes instructions to query the board version of a Macro NodeB or a distributed

 NodeB.

Context

l This procedure is used to determine the version information of the running boards including

the cabinet number, subrack number, slot number, CPU number, board software version,

 board hardware version, and BootROM version. This information enables you to check the

consistency between the board version and the NodeB version.

l When a distributed NodeB is queried, the procedures for RRU and BBU are different.

Procedure

l GUI mode

Macro NodeB board and distributed NodeB BBU board:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Device

Panel tab.

2. Select Device Management > Main Cabinet. The NodeB device panel is displayed.

3. Select the board to be queried on the device panel.

4. Right-click the board. The shortcut menu is displayed.

5. Select Display Board Version. A dialog box is displayed, showing the version

information for the board.

Distributed NodeB RRU:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the

Maintenance tab.

2. Double-click Topology Management > RRU Physical Topology. The physical

topology is displayed.

3. Right-click the RRU to be queried. The shortcut menu is displayed.

4. Select Display Board Version. A dialog box is displayed, showing the version

information for the board.

l MML mode

Run the command DSP BRDVER .

----End

8.4.5 Querying the CPU Usage of a NodeB Board

This section includes instructions to query the CPU usage on a Macro NodeB and a distributed NodeB.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

Page 82: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 82/204

Context

l This function checks the usage of the CPUs and DSPs on the board (including the secondary

CPU), enabling you to determine whether the system is overloaded.

l When a distributed NodeB is queried, the procedures RRU and BBU are different.

Procedure

l GUI mode

Macro NodeB board and distributed NodeB BBU board:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Device

Panel tab.

2. Select Device Management > Main Cabinet. The NodeB device panel is displayed.

3. Select the board to be queried on the device panel, and right-click the board. The

shortcut menu is displayed.

4. Select Display CPU Usage. The CPU/DSP Usage window is displayed, showing the

CPU/DSP usage of the board.

Distributed NodeB RRU:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the

Maintenance tab.

2. Double-click Topology Management > RRU Physical Topology. The physical

topology is displayed.

3. Right-click the RRU to be queried. The shortcut menu is displayed.

4. Select Display CPU Usage. The CPU/DSP Usage window is displayed, showing the

CPU/DSP usage of the board.

l MML mode

Run the command DSP CPUUSAGE.

----End

8.4.6 Querying the E1/T1 Link Status

This section includes instructions to query the states of the E1/T1 links to determine whether 

the current E1/T1 link is within normal range.

PrerequisiteYou have logged in to the NodeB LMT.

Context

l This operation is only available on the WMPT or UTRP board in a macro NodeB or a BBU

in a distributed NodeB.

Procedure

l GUI Mode:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the DevicePanel tab.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

Page 83: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 83/204

2. Double-click Device Management > Main Cabinet. The device panel is displayed.

3. Select the WMPT or UTRP on the device panel, and right-click the board. A shortcut

menu is displayed.

4. Select Display E1/T1 State. The Display E1/T1 State dialog box is displayed.

5. Set the necessary parameters in the dialog box.

6. Click OK . The status of all E1/T1 links of the board is displayed in the dialog box.

l MML Mode:

Run the DSP E1T1 command to query the E1/T1 link status of a specific board.

----End

8.4.7 Querying the E1/T1 Work Mode

This section includes instructions to query the work mode of the E1/T1 links.

Prerequisite

You have logged in to the NodeB LMT.

Context

l This operation is only available on the WMPT or UTRP board in a macro NodeB or the

BBU in a distributed NodeB.

Procedure

l GUI Mode:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Device

Panel tab.

2. Double-click Device Management > Main Cabinet. The device panel is displayed.

3. Select the WMPT or UTRP on the device panel, and right-click the board. A shortcut

menu is displayed.

4. Select Display E1/T1 Work Mode. The Display E1/T1 Work Mode dialog box is

displayed.

5. Set the necessary parameters in the dialog box.

6. Click OK , and the work mode of all E1/T1 links of the board is displayed in the dialog

 box.

----End

8.4.8 Querying the STM-1 State

This section includes instructions to query the state of the STM-1 optical port to determine

whether the current STM-1 port is within normal range.

Prerequisite

You have logged in to the NodeB LMT.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

Page 84: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 84/204

Context

l This operation is only available on the UTRP board in a macro NodeB or the BBU in a

distributed NodeB.

Procedure

l GUI Mode:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Device

Panel tab.

2. Double-click Device Management > Main Cabinet. The device panel is displayed.

3. Select the WMPT or UTRP on the device panel, and right-click the board. A shortcut

menu is displayed.

4. Select Display STM-1 State. The Display STM-1 State dialog box is displayed.

5. Set the necessary parameters in the dialog box.

6. Click OK . The status of the STM-1 optical port is displayed in the dialog box.

l MML Mode:

Run the DSP STM1 command to query the STM-1 state of a specific board.

----End

8.4.9 Querying the STM-1 Working Mode

This section includes instructions to query the work mode of the STM-1 optical port.

PrerequisiteYou have logged in to the NodeB LMT.

Context

l This operation is only available on the UTRP board in a macro NodeB or the BBU in a

distributed NodeB.

Procedure

l GUI Mode:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the DevicePanel tab.

2. Double-click Device Management > Main Cabinet. The device panel is displayed.

3. Select the WMPT or UTRP on the device panel, and right-click the board. A shortcut

menu is displayed.

4. Select Display STM-1 Work Mode. The Display STM-1 Work Mode dialog box

is displayed.

5. Set the necessary parameters in the dialog box.

6. Click OK , and the work mode of the STM-1 optical port is displayed in the dialog

 box.

l MML Mode:

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

Page 85: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 85/204

Run the DSP STM1 command to query the STM-1 work mode of a specific board.

----End

8.4.10 Blocking/Unblocking a NodeB BoardThis section includes instructions to block or unblock a NodeB board on the LMT.

Prerequisite

You have logged in to the NodeB LMT.

Context

l This operation helps to perform maintenance without interrupting the system services.

l This task only applies to service processing boards such as the WBBP, WRFU, and RRU.

It is not applicable to the WMPT or UTRP boards.

l When a board is blocked, the board is available but cannot process services. Services on

that board are cleared and the subsequent new services are switched to other boards.

l Boards support repeated blocking.

Procedure

l GUI mode:

Macro NodeB board and distributed NodeB BBU board:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the DevicePanel tab.

2. Double-click Device Management > Main Cabinet. The device panel interface is

displayed on the right.

3. Select a board on the device panel, and right-click the board. The shortcut menu is

displayed.

4. Select Block Board. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

5. Click Yes in the dialog box. The LMT displays the result and refreshes the board color 

indicator.

Distributed NodeB RRU:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the

Maintenance tab.

2. Double-click Topology Management > RRU Physical Topology. The physical

topology is displayed.

3. Right-click the RRU node. The shortcut menu is displayed.

4. Select Block Board. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

5. Click Yes in the dialog box. The LMT displays the result and refreshes the board color 

indicator.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

Page 86: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 86/204

NOTE

l You can unblock a board only when it is blocked.

l The procedure for unblocking a board is similar to that for blocking a board. You can unblock a

 board by right-clicking a blocked board and then choosing Unblock Board from the shortcut

menu.

l MML mode:

Run the BLK BRD command.

Run the UBL BRD command.

----End

8.4.11 Resetting a NodeB Board

This section includes instructions to reset a NodeB board.

Prerequisite

You have logged in to the NodeB LMT.

Context

This operation is required when a board is faulty. The board is initialized and restored after the

reset.

CAUTION

l Resetting a board causes the board to restart.

l Resetting a board may cause data loss to its services.

l Resetting a board may cause it to become unavailable. After it is initialized again, it will be

available for service.

l Resetting the active WMPT may result in the entire NodeB reset.

l When the multi-mode base station works in co-module mode, resetting the TRX module

interrupts the services of the other mode.

l When the multi-mode base station supports co-transmission through ports on a board working

in UMTS mode, resetting the board where ports shared by both modes interrupts the servicesof the other mode.

Procedure

l GUI mode

Macro NodeB board and distributed NodeB BBU board:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Device

Panel tab.

2. Double-click Device Management > Main Cabinet. The device panel interface isdisplayed on the right.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

Page 87: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 87/204

3. Select the board to be reset on the device panel, and right-click the board. The shortcut

menu is displayed.

4. Select Reset Board. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

5. Click Yes in the dialog box. The LMT displays the result and refreshes the board color 

indicator.

Distributed NodeB RRU:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the

Maintenance tab.

2. Double-click Topology Management > RRU Physical Topology. The physical

topology is displayed.

3. Right-click the RRU node. The shortcut menu is displayed.

4. Select Reset Board. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

5. Click Yes in the dialog box. The LMT displays the result and refreshes the board color indicator.

l MML mode:

Run the RST BRD command.

----End

8.4.12 Adding and Removing a NodeB Board

This section includes instructions to add or remove a NodeB board using MML commands.

Prerequisite

Before adding or removing a NodeB board, ensure the operation will not affect current services

or other boards. If necessary, back up the NodeB system.

Context

l When the NodeB capacity is changed, this task modifies the data configuration file of the

 NodeB directly.

Procedure

l Run the command ADD BRD to add a board.

l Run the command RMV BRD to remove a board.

----End

8.4.13 Querying the Current Clock Status

This section describes how to query the current status of the clock.

Prerequisite

You have logged in to the NodeB LMT.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

Page 88: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 88/204

Context

l This function checks whether the setting changes are correct and whether the clock needs

adjustment.

l This operation is only applicable to the WMPT board.

l The current status of the clock includes:

– The configured clock source

– The status of current clock source

– The clock status

– The DA value of the carrier frequency

– The DA value of the current frequency

– The initial DA value

Procedurel GUI Mode:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Device

Panel tab.

2. Double-click Device Management > Main Cabinet. The device panel is displayed.

3. Select the WMPT on the device panel, and right-click the WMPT board. A shortcut

menu is displayed.

4. Select Display Current Clock Status. The current clock status is displayed.

NOTE

The clocks of the active and standby WMPT are independent. Therefore, you can query their statusseparately. In the query result, the clock source and the status of the clock source should be the same

in the active WMPT and the standby WMPT. Other parameters in the query results of the active

WMPT and the standby WMPT clocks can be different.

l MML Mode:

Run the DSP CLKSTAT command to query the current clock status.

----End

8.4.14 Querying the Sequence ID of the RRU

This section includes instructions to query the sequence ID of the RRU.

Prerequisite

This procedure may only be executed on a macro NodeB where a RRU has been installed.

Context

This operation is the same in a macro NodeB and a distributed NodeB.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane, click the Maintenance tab.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

Page 89: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 89/204

Step 2 Double-click Topology Management > RRU Physical Topology. The physical topology is

displayed.

Step 3 Right-click the RRU node. The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 4 Select Display Device Sequence ID. The Result Information dialog box is displayed, listingthe result.

----End

8.4.15 Adding a Sector

This section includes instructions to add an RRU to a specified sector.

Prerequisite

Ensure that the site of the specific sector exists. Otherwise, the task will fail.

Context

l The TX/RX mode of distributed sectors is always unidirectional (TX/RX).

l When adding a distributed sector, you can add a group of RRUs with continuous subrack 

numbers. The cabinet number and slot number of each RRU must be the same. The subrack 

number starts from the first RRU to the last RRU.

Procedure

l

GUI Mode:1. In the navigation pane, click the Maintenance tab.

2. Double-click Topology Management > RRU Physical Topology. The physical

topology is displayed.

3. Right-click the RRU node. A shortcut menu is displayed.

4. Choose Add Sector from the shortcut menu.

The Add Sector dialog box is displayed. Table 8-6 describes the parameters in the

dialog box.

5. Set the parameters, and then click OK .

NOTE

Parameters are dependent on actual scenarios. Therefore, not all the parameters listed below

will display in the dialog box.

Table 8-6 Add Sector Parameters

Parameter Description

Site No. Indicates the number of the site where the sector is configured.

Sector No. Indicates the number of the sector. Sector No. uniquely

identifies a sector in a site. A maximum of six sectors can be

configured on each site.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

Page 90: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 90/204

Parameter Description

Sector Type Indicates the type of the sector to be added.

Sector Type can be set to REMOTE_SECTOR  or 

DIST_SECTOR .

RX Antenna

Magnitude

Indicates the number of RX antennas in the sector.

This parameter is valid only when Sector Type is set to

REMOTE_SECTOR .

Diversity Mode This parameter is valid only when Sector Type is set to

REMOTE_SECTOR .

Diversity Mode can be set to COMMON_MODE or 

HALFFREQ.

Cover Type This parameter is valid only when Sector Type is set to

REMOTE_SECTOR  and Diversity Mode is set toHALFFREQ.

Cover Type can be set to SAMEZONE or DIFFZONE.

Cabinet No. of 

RRU (Begin)

Indicates the number of the cabinet where the first RRU is

located.

This parameter is valid only when Sector Type is set to

DIST_SECTOR .

Subrack No. of 

RRU (Begin)

Indicates the number of the subrack where the first RRU is

located.

This parameter is valid only when Sector Type is set to

DIST_SECTOR .

Slot No. of RRU

(Begin)

Indicates the number of the slot where the first RRU is located.

This parameter is valid only when Sector Type is set to

DIST_SECTOR .

Cabinet No. of 

RRU (End)

Indicates the cabinet number of the last RRU. The first RRU

and the last RRU have the same cabinet number.

This parameter is valid only when Sector Type is set to

DIST_SECTOR .

Subrack No. of 

RRU (End)

Indicates the subrack number of the last RRU. The subrack 

number of the last RRU must be equal to or larger than thesubrack number of the first RRU.

This parameter is valid only when Sector Type is set to

DIST_SECTOR .

Slot No. of RRU

(End)

Indicates the slot number of the last RRU. The first RRU and

the last RRU have the same slot number.

This parameter is valid only when Sector Type is set to

DIST_SECTOR .

 

lMML Mode:

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

Page 91: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 91/204

Run the ADD SEC command.

----End

8.4.16 Modifying the Emission Power of the RRUThis section includes instructions to modify the emission power of the RRU.

Procedure

l GUI mode

1. In the navigation pane, click the Maintenance tab.

2. Double-click Topology Management > RRU Physical Topology. The physical

topology is displayed.

3. Right-click the RRU node. The shortcut menu is displayed.

4. Select Change Emissivity.

The Change Emissivity dialog box is displayed, and parameter description is as

shown in Table 8-7.

5. Set the parameters, and then click OK .

NOTE

Parameters are dependent on actual scenarios. Therefore, not all the parameters listed below

will display in the dialog box.

Table 8-7 Change Emissivity Parameters

Field Description

Local Cell ID ID of the local cell

Cabinet No. of RRU Number of the cabinet where the RRU is located.

Subrack No. of RRU Number of the subrack where the RRU is located.

Slot No. of RRU Number of the slot where the RRU is located.

Power Setting Mode Mode to specify the RRU power. You can choose

DEFAULT or ABSOLUTE.

l DEFAULT: using the default power specified by the

local celll ABSOLUTE: using the absolute value specific to

this PA

Max RRU Output Power 

(0.1dBm)

This parameter is valid only when the power setting

mode is set to ABSOLUTE.

 

l MML mode

Run the command MOD RRUOFLOCELL.

----End

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

Page 92: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 92/204

8.4.17 Setting Floor and Position

This section includes instructions to set the floor and position.

Context

l This operation can only be performed on the RRU.

l This operation can only be performed in GUI mode. There is no corresponding MML

command.

NOTE

The floor and position set here are not the actual floor position, but the topology position. This operation

can easily be done by dragging the node to the position you choose in the GUI after the physical topology

is displayed.

Procedure

Step 1 Double-click Topology Management > RRU Physical Topology. The physical topology is

displayed.

Step 2 Right-click the RRU node. The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Select Set Floor and Position.

The Set Floor and Position dialog box is displayed, and parameter description is as shown in

Table 8-8.

Step 4 Set the parameters, and then click OK .

Table 8-8 Set Floor and Position Parameters

Field Description

Subrack No: Number of the subrack where the RRU is located.

X-Coordinate The X coordinates of the RRU in the physical topology.

Y-Coordinate The Y coordinates of the RRU in the physical topology

Floor Number of the floor where the RRU is located.

 

----End

8.4.18 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information

This section includes instructions to query the board manufacturing information including the

 board type, bar code, description, manufactured date, vendor's name, and issue number.

Context

This function queries all boards except the slave CPU, UBF, UPEA, UPEB, and UEIU. To query

the backplane, set the parameters as follows: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=255.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

Page 93: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 93/204

Procedure

l GUI mode:

Macro NodeB board and distributed NodeB BBU board:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the DevicePanel tab.

2. Select Device Management > Main Cabinet. The NodeB device panel is displayed.

3. Select a board on the device panel, and right-click the board. The shortcut menu is

displayed.

4. Select List Board Manufacturing Information.

The List Board Manufacturing Information dialog box is displayed with the

manufacturing information of the board.

Distributed NodeB RRU:

1. In the navigation pane, click the Maintenance tab.

2. Double-click Topology Management > RRU Physical Topology. The physical

topology is displayed.

3. Right-click the RRU node. The shortcut menu is displayed.

4. Select List Board Manufacturing Information.

The List Board Manufacturing Information dialog box is displayed.

5. Set the Cabinet No. (CN), Subrack No. (SRN), and Slot No. (SN), and click OK .

l MML mode:

Run the MML command line DSP BRDMFRINFO.

----End

8.4.19 Opening the Related Shelf

This section provides instructions for opening the shelf or cabinet related to the RRU through

the physical topology.

Context

l This operation can only be performed on the RRU.

l This operation can only be performed in GUI mode. There is no corresponding MML

command.

Procedure

Step 1 Double-click Topology Management > RRU Physical Topology. The physical topology is

displayed.

Step 2 Right-click the RRU node. The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 3 Select Open Related Shelf .

This will only display the shelf or cabinet information when they exist.

----End

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 8 Managing NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

Page 94: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 94/204

9 Managing the Interface Tracings

About This Chapter

After creating an interface tracing task, you can browse and save the traced messages.

9.1 Basic Concepts of the Interface Tracing

This section describes the basic concepts of the interface tracing.

9.2 Tracing Iub interface Messages

This section describes how to trace messages at the Iub interface. Traced messages can be

automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.

9.3 Tracing SCTP MessagesThis section describes how to trace SCTP messages. This task is performed to trace the

interaction of  SCTP Messages and locate problems that lead to the unavailability of the SCTP

link. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced

messages online or offline.

9.4 Tracing IP Messages

This section describes how to trace IP messages. This task is performed to locate problems that

lead to the unavailability of the IP path. Traced messages can be automatically or manually

saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.

9.5 Tracing ICP Messages

This section describes how to trace ICP messages. This task is performed to trace the interaction

of ICP cells on the IMA link and locate problems that lead to the unavailability of theinterconnection between the NodeB and the peer IMA. Traced messages can be automatically

or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.

9.6 Tracing SAAL Messages

This section describes how to trace SAAL messages. Start the SAAL Protocol Tracing task to

monitor the interaction between messages of the SAAL protocol and locate problems causing

SAAL links to be unavailable. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You

can browse the traced messages online or offline.

9.7 Tracing User Messages

This section describes how to trace user messages. This task is performed to trace user messages

and locate problems of user messages. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved.You can browse the traced messages online or offline.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

Page 95: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 95/204

9.8 Tracing Cell Messages

This section describes how to trace cell messages. This task is performed to trace cell messages

and locate problems of cell messages. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved.

You can browse the traced messages online or offline.

9.9 Tracing PPP MessagesThis section describes how to trace message interworking of Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) links.

Tracing the messages helps locate problems in PPP interconnection between a NodeB and a peer 

device. The traced messages can be saved automatically or manually and browsed online or 

offline.

9.10 Tracing MP Messages

This section describes how to trace message interworking of Multilink Protocol (MP) links in

an MP group. Tracing the messages helps locate problems in MP group interconnection between

a NodeB and a peer device. The traced messages can be saved automatically or manually and

 browsed online or offline.

9.11 Tracing MAC MessagesThis section describes how to trace the MAC messages. Problems related to the Iub interface,

OM channel, and packet loss can be located by analyzing the header and content of the data

 packet. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced

messages online or offline.

9.12 Tracing PTP Messages

This section describes how to trace the PTP messages and locate the PTP message problem.

Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages

online or offline.

9.13 Basic Operations of Interface Tracings

This section describes the basic operations of interface tracings. You may browse, view, and

save tracing messages. Instructions are also included for resuming or deleting tracing tasks, andtracing task pausing. These operations are available for all message tracing tasks.

9.14 Interface Reference for Managing the Interface Tracing

This section provides parameter descriptions for managing the interface tracings.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

Page 96: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 96/204

9.1 Basic Concepts of the Interface Tracing 

This section describes the basic concepts of the interface tracing.

Functions of Message Tracing Management

Message tracing management is used to trace interfaces, signaling links, and internal messages.

It is used for routine equipment maintenance, debugging, and fault location.

The NodeB provides the following tracing functions:

l Tracing the Iub interface signaling

l Tracing IP messages

l Tracing SCTP messages

lTracing ICP messages

l Tracing SAAL messages

l Tracing user messages

l Tracing cell messages

l Tracing MAC messages

l Tracing PTP Messages

Internal Process for Tracing Messages

This section describes the internal processes for creating a tracing task and reporting traced

messages from a board to the LMT.

l Creating a tracing task 

– The operator creates a tracing task on the LMT, and the LMT sends a binary command

to the BAM to create the task.

– The BAM assigns an ID to the task and forwards the command to the debugging module

of the specified board.

– After receiving the command, the debugging module records the filter parameters of 

the tracing data in the filter table and notifies the service module.

– The service module updates the local filter table according to the message from the

debugging module.

l Reporting traced messages

– The service module filters the collected messages according to the filter parameters in

the local filter table and reports the messages that meet the requirements to the BAM.

– The BAM server forwards the messages to the LMT that created the task according to

the task ID.

– The LMT translates the traced messages and displays them on the interface.

9.2 Tracing Iub interface Messages

This section describes how to trace messages at the Iub interface. Traced messages can beautomatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

Page 97: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 97/204

Context

l Four Iub message tracing tasks can be created on the LMT at one time. One message display

window can be created for each tracing task.

l The prompt for a busy system and failure in starting an Iub message tracing task may

originate in an overloaded CPU. It is recommended that you start the tracing task 30 seconds

after the CPU overload has cleared.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree, select Trace Management > Interface Trace Task  > Iub.

The Standard Signaling Interface Tracing dialog box is displayed. For the parameter details,

see 9.14.1 Interface Reference for IUB Tracing.

Step 2 Select the type of message to be reported, and click OK .

The Standard Signaling Interface Tracing window is displayed. You can query the messageflow of the interface from the displayed window.

For the detail operation in the window, see 9.13 Basic Operations of Interface Tracings.

NOTE

YYYY-MM-DD_HH-MM-SS (Tick, one Tick corresponds to 10 ms) represents the task creation time.

YYYY, MM, DD, HH, MM, and SS represent year, month, day, hour, minute, and second respectively.

----End

9.3 Tracing SCTP MessagesThis section describes how to trace SCTP messages. This task is performed to trace the

interaction of SCTP Messages and locate problems that lead to the unavailability of the SCTP

link. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced

messages online or offline.

Context

In IP transport mode, the lower layer link used by the NCP or a CCP is the SCTP link. When

the NCP or a CCP is not functional, you can start the SCTP protocol tracing task to query

information on the SCTP link of concern. The SCTP link receives and transmits data frequently.

Therefore, starting this tracing task may affect the system performance. You are advised not tostart multiple SCTP tracing tasks simultaneously.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree, select Trace Management > Interface Trace Task  > SCTP.

The SCTP Tracing dialog box is displayed. For the parameter details, see 9.14.2 Interface

Reference for SCTP Tracing.

Step 2 Set the corresponding parameters, and click OK .

The message browsing window is displayed. You can query the message flow of the interfacefrom the displayed window.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

Page 98: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 98/204

For the detail operation in the window, see 9.13 Basic Operations of Interface Tracings.

----End

9.4 Tracing IP MessagesThis section describes how to trace IP messages. This task is performed to locate problems that

lead to the unavailability of the IP path. Traced messages can be automatically or manually

saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree, select Trace Management > Interface Trace Task  > IP.

The IP Tracing dialog box is displayed. For the parameter details, see 9.14.3 Interface

Reference for IP Tracing.

Step 2 Set the corresponding parameters, and click OK .

The message browsing window is displayed. You can query the message flow of the interface

from the displayed window.

For the detail operation in the window, see 9.13 Basic Operations of Interface Tracings.

----End

9.5 Tracing ICP Messages

This section describes how to trace ICP messages. This task is performed to trace the interaction

of ICP cells on the IMA link and locate problems that lead to the unavailability of the

interconnection between the NodeB and the peer IMA. Traced messages can be automatically

or manually saved. You can browse the traced messages online or offline.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree, select Trace Management > Interface Trace Task  > ICP.

The ICP Tracing dialog box is displayed. For the parameter details, see 9.14.4 Interface

Reference for ICP Tracing.

Step 2 Set the corresponding parameters, and click OK .

The message browsing window is displayed. You can query the message flow of the interfacefrom the displayed window.

For the detail operation in the window, see 9.13 Basic Operations of Interface Tracings.

----End

9.6 Tracing SAAL Messages

This section describes how to trace SAAL messages. Start the SAAL Protocol Tracing task to

monitor the interaction between messages of the SAAL protocol and locate problems causing

SAAL links to be unavailable. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. Youcan browse the traced messages online or offline.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

Page 99: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 99/204

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree, double-click Trace Management > Interface Trace Task  > SAAL.

The SAAL Tracing dialog box is displayed. For the parameter details, see 9.14.5 InterfaceReference for SAAL Tracing.

Step 2 Set the corresponding parameters, and click OK .

The message browsing window is displayed. You can query the message flow of the interface

from the displayed window.

For the detail operation in the window, see 9.13 Basic Operations of Interface Tracings.

NOTE

The SAAL Protocol Tracing task is performed to locate the problem that leads to the unavailability of the

SAAL link. If there are only outgoing but no incoming NodeB messages, you can infer that the lower layer 

link (PVC) or the peer end works abnormally.

----End

9.7 Tracing User Messages

This section describes how to trace user messages. This task is performed to trace user messages

and locate problems of user messages. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved.

You can browse the traced messages online or offline.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree, select Trace Management > Interf ace Trace Task  > User. The User

Tracing dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-1.

Figure 9-1 User Tracing dialog box

 

For the parameter details in the dialog box, see 9.14.6 Interface Reference for User Tracing.

Step 2 Click the Basic tab, and set the corresponding parameters.

Step 3 Click the IUB tab, and select the type of the IUB message to be traced.

Step 4 Click the UU tab, and select the type of the UU message to be traced. Then set the parameters

 based on the requirements of the tracing task.

Step 5 Click OK . The message browsing window is displayed. You can query the message flow of the

interface from the displayed window.

For the detail operation in the window, see 9.13 Basic Operations of Interface Tracings.

----End

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

Page 100: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 100/204

9.8 Tracing Cell Messages

This section describes how to trace cell messages. This task is performed to trace cell messages

and locate problems of cell messages. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved.

You can browse the traced messages online or offline.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, select Trace

Management > Interface Trace Task  > Cell. The Cell Tracing dialog box is displayed, as

shown in Figure 9-2.

Figure 9-2 Cell Tracing dialog box

 

For the parameter details in the dialog box, see 9.14.7 Interface Reference for Cell Tracing.

Step 2 Click the Basic tab, and set the corresponding parameter s.

Step 3 Click the IUB tab, and select the type of the IUB message to be traced.

Step 4 Click the UU tab, and select the type of the UU message to be traced. Then set the parameters based on the requirements of the tracing task.

Step 5 Click OK . The message browsing window is displayed. You can query the message flow of the

interface from the displayed window.

For the detail operation in the window, see 9.13 Basic Operations of Interface Tracings.

----End

9.9 Tracing PPP Messages

This section describes how to trace message interworking of Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) links.

Tracing the messages helps locate problems in PPP interconnection between a NodeB and a peer 

device. The traced messages can be saved automatically or manually and browsed online or 

offline.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane, choose Trace Management > Interface Trace Task  > PPP.

The PPP Tracing dialog box is displayed. For description about related parameters, see 9.14.8

Interface Reference for PPP Tracing.

Step 2 Set parameters and click OK . View traced messages in the displayed browsing window of tracedmessages.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

Page 101: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 101/204

For detailed operations to be performed in the window, see 9.13 Basic Operations of Interface

Tracings.

----End

9.10 Tracing MP MessagesThis section describes how to trace message interworking of Multilink Protocol (MP) links in

an MP group. Tracing the messages helps locate problems in MP group interconnection between

a NodeB and a peer device. The traced messages can be saved automatically or manually and

 browsed online or offline.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane, choose Trace Management > Interface Trace Task  > MP.

The MP Tracing dialog box is displayed. For description about related parameters, see 9.14.9

Interface Reference for MP Tracing.

Step 2 Set parameters and click OK . View traced messages in the displayed browsing window of traced

messages.

For detailed operations to be performed in the window, see 9.13 Basic Operations of Interface

Tracings.

----End

9.11 Tracing MAC MessagesThis section describes how to trace the MAC messages. Problems related to the Iub interface,

OM channel, and packet loss can be located by analyzing the header and content of the data

 packet. Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced

messages online or offline.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane, double-click Trace Management > Interface Trace Task  > MAC.

The MAC Trace dialog box is displayed. For the parameter details in the MAC Trace dialog

 box, see 9.14.10 Interface Reference for MAC Tracing.

Step 2 Set the corresponding parameters, and click OK .The message browsing window is displayed. You can query the message flow of the interface

from the displayed window.

For the detail operation in the window, see 9.13 Basic Operations of Interface Tracings.

----End

9.12 Tracing PTP Messages

This section describes how to trace the PTP messages and locate the PTP message problem.

Traced messages can be automatically or manually saved. You can browse the traced messagesonline or offline.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

Page 102: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 102/204

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane, double-click Trace Management > Interface Trace Task  > PTP.

The PTP Trace dialog box is displayed. For the parameter details in the PTP Trace dialog box,

see 9.14.11 Interface Reference for PTP Tracing.

Step 2 Set the corresponding parameters, and click OK .

The message browsing window is displayed. You can query the message flow of the interface

from the displayed window.

For the detail operation in the window, see 9.13 Basic Operations of Interface Tracings.

----End

9.13 Basic Operations of Interface Tracings

This section describes the basic operations of interface tracings. You may browse, view, and

save tracing messages. Instructions are also included for resuming or deleting tracing tasks, and

tracing task pausing. These operations are available for all message tracing tasks.

9.13.1 Browsing Traced Messages Online

This section describes how to browse the traced messages online in the message browse window

after the tracing task has been created.

Prerequisite

l A tracing task is successfully created.

l Traced messages are reported.

Context

You can right-click a traced message in the message browse window, and select an item from

the shortcut menu to perform the associated operation as listed below.

Operations Description

Stop Trace Task Suspends the tracing task.

Restart Trace Task Restarts the suspended tracing task.

Recreate Trace Task Recreates the tracing task.

Save All Messages Saves all traced messages.

Save Selected Messages Saves selected traced messages.

Auto Scroll Scrolls through the message browse window in real time.

Clear Messages Deletes all messages from the message browse window.

Prompt When Overload

Control Occurs

Displays prompts in the case of overload.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

Page 103: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 103/204

Operations Description

Close All xxx Message

Trace Tasks

Closes all the XXX message tracing tasks (xxx stands for the

type of tracing tasks).

Properties Queries the task properties.

 

Procedure

Step 1 Browse or query the traced messages in the message browse window in real time.

Step 2 To learn about the details of a message, double-click it. The Message Browser dialog box is

displayed showing details of the message.

----End

9.13.2 Querying the Properties of the Tracing Task

This section describes how to query the properties of the tracing task in the message browse

window.

Prerequisite

l A tracing task is successfully created.

l Traced messages are reported.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click in the message browse window, and then choose Property from the shortcut menu.

Step 2 The Trace Properties dialog box is displayed, showing the properties of the tracing task.

Step 3 Click OK  to close the window.

----End

9.13.3 Viewing a Message Translation

This section describes how to view the translation of a message in the message browse window.

Prerequisite

l A tracing task is created.

l Traced messages are reported.

Procedure

Step 1 In the message browse window, select and double-click the traced message.

Step 2 The Message Browser window is displayed, showing the details and meaning of the messagein protocol translation format.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

Page 104: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 104/204

Step 3 Click on the top right of the window to close it.

----End

9.13.4 Automatically Saving Traced MessagesThis section describes how to enable the automatically saving function, which saves traced

messages in the local directory as files.

Prerequisite

l A tracing task is created.

l Traced messages are reported.

Context

lThe default save path is LMT installation directory\client\output\NodeB\ LMT softwareversion number \trace.

l The default file name is Office name_xxx tracing_YYYY-MM-DD-HH-MM-SS .

l The file is automatically saved in .tmf format.

Procedure

l When a tracing task is created, Auto Save is selected by default. The default setting is used

to automatically save all messages displayed in the message browse window.

NOTE

l The LMT saves every 5,000 messages in a file. From the 5001st message, the next set of 5,000

messages are saved in the file that is named using a serial number. For example, the default nameof the file that contains the 5001st to 10000th SCTP messages is Office name_SCTP_YYYY-MM-

 DD-HH-MM-SS_1 and so on.

l You can use the Trace Viewer to browse offline the messages saved in .tmf format. For details,

refer to 9.13.9 Browsing a Traced Message Offline.

l When a tracing task is created, deselect the Auto Save check box. Once this feature is

deselected, messages displayed in the message browse window are not saved automatically.

----End

9.13.5 Saving Traced Messages Manually

This section describes how to manually save all or part of messages when the tracing task isrunning.

Prerequisite

l A tracing task is successfully created.

l Traced messages are reported.

Context

l The default save path is LMT installation directory\client\output\NodeB\ LMT software

version number \trace.

l The default file name is Office name_xxx tracing_YYYY-MM-DD-HH-MM-SS .tmf.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

Page 105: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 105/204

l You can manually save the messages in the .tmf, .txt or .csv format.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click the message browse window and select Save All Messages. To save selectedmessages, right-click the messages to be saved and select Save Selected Messages. The Save

dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Enter a file name and specify a path and a file type.

Step 3 Click Save.

----End

9.13.6 Suspending a Tracing Task

This section describes how to suspend a tracing task when the tracing is not required.

Prerequisite

A tracing task is successfully created.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click in the message browser window to be paused. The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 2 Choose Stop Trace Task  from the shortcut menu.

----End

9.13.7 Resuming a Tracing Task

This section describes how to resume a tracing task when you want to continue the tracing task.

Prerequisite

A tracing task is suspended.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click the message browse window. The shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 2 Select Restart Trace Task  from the shortcut menu.

----End

9.13.8 Closing a Tracing Task

This section describes how to close a tracing task to release system resource when the task is

not needed.

Prerequisite

A tracing task is created.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

Page 106: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 106/204

Procedure

l Click in the top right corner of the message browse window.

l Right-click in the message browse window, and choose Close All xxx Message Trace

Tasks ( xxx stands for specific tracing tasks). If an IP tracing task needs to be closed, chooseClose All IP Message Trace Tasks.

----End

9.13.9 Browsing a Traced Message Offline

This section describes how to use the Trace Viewer to browse offline messages that are saved

in .tmf format.

Prerequisite

A traced message is saved.

Context

You can find the .txt or .csv files in the save directory. Double-click a file to read the traced

messages.

Procedure

Step 1 Select any of the following methods to start the Trace Viewer:

Method

1:

On the LMT, select View > Trace Viewer.

Method

2: On the LMT, click on the toolbar.

Method

3:

Select Start > All Programs > Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal >Trace

Viewer. The Open dialog box is displayed.

 

Step 2 Select a file. The default save path for the files is installation directory\client\output\NodeB

\LMT software version number\trace.

Step 3 Click Open. The content of the message is displayed in the Trace Viewer window.

Step 4 Browse these messages, or double-click one to view its details.

For the function reference of the shortcut menu in the Trace Viewer window, see 9.14.12

Interface Reference for Trace Viewer.

Step 5 To review other saved results, choose File > Open. In the Open dialog box, you may select and

open files.

----End

9.14 Interface Reference for Managing the Interface Tracing 

This section provides parameter descriptions for managing the interface tracings.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

Page 107: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 107/204

9.14.1 Interface Reference for IUB Tracing 

This section describes the interface reference for the standard signaling tracing.

Field Description

Report

Message Type

All the Iub tracing message types are listed including the NBAP and

ALCAP messages.

Filter out messages of minor significance by clearing the check box before

the message type.

Auto Save Select Autosave. The messages are automatically saved in the default path,

or you can specify the path. Messages are saved one at a time in the message

file.

 

9.14.2 Interface Reference for SCTP Tracing 

This section describes the interface reference for the SCTP tracing.

Field Description

Cabinet No. Indicates the cabinet number of the board of which the SCTP messages are

traced.

Subrack No. Indicates the subrack number of the board of which the SCTP messages are

traced.

Slot No. Indicates the slot number of the board of which the SCTP messages are

traced.

Sctp LinkNo. Indicates the number of the SCTP link to be traced.

Sctp Trace

Type

This parameter can be set to Packet and Chunk .

Direction This parameter can be set to Receive, Send, and RS.

Autosave When Autosave is selected, the messages are automatically saved in the

default path. You can also specify another path for saving the reported

messages.

 

9.14.3 Interface Reference for IP Tracing 

This section describes the interface reference for IP tracing.

Field Name Notes

Cabinet No. Cabinet number of the board in which the IP messages are

traced.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

Page 108: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 108/204

Field Name Notes

Subrack No. Subrack number of the board in which the IP messages are

traced.

Slot No. Slot number of the board in which the IP messages aretraced.

Direction This can be set to Out, In, or Both.

Protocol This can be set to All, UDP, or SCTP.

Intercept Select This determines whether the message is reported after  

intercept selection.

This can be set to Intercept Length Appointed or 

Intercept Length Not Appointed.

Intercept Length This specifies the upper limit intercept length of the

reported message.

This parameter is valid only when Intercept Select is set to

Intercept Length Appointed.

Value range: 28 to 1500. Default value: 60.

IP Packet

In Max

Judgement

Condition

This specifies the judgment condition on the length of data

 packet to be obtained in the NodeB incoming direction.

This can be set to Equals ,Less than or All.

Packet Length This specifies the length of the data packet to be obtained

in the NodeB incoming direction.

Value range: 0 to 3000. Default value: 1500.

IP Packet

Out Max

Judgement

Condition

This specifies the judgment condition on the length of data

 packet to be obtained in the NodeB outgoing direction.

This can be set to Equals ,Less than or All.

Packet Length This specifies the length of the data packet to be obtained

in the NodeB outgoing direction.

Value range: 0 to 3000. Default value: 1500.

Local IP Address Local IP address to be traced. The default value is 0, which

means that all IP can be traced.

Peer IP Address Peer IP address to be traced. The default value is 0, which

means that all IP can be traced.

Autosave Select Autosave, and the reported messages are

automatically saved in the default path. You may also

specify the path for saving the reported messages.

 

9.14.4 Interface Reference for ICP Tracing 

This section describes the interface reference for the ICP tracing.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

Page 109: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 109/204

Field Description

Cabinet

 Number 

Cabinet number of the board in which the ICP messages are traced.

Subrack  Number 

Subrack number of the board in which the ICP messages are traced.

Slot Number Slot number of the board in which the ICP messages are traced.

Sub-Board

Type

E1_COVERBOARDis selected automatically.

IMA Group

 Number 

The number of the IMA group.

Value range:0~3

Direction Value range:In,Outor Both

Auto Save Select Autosave, and the reported messages are automatically saved in thedefault path. You may also specify the path for saving the reported

messages.

 

9.14.5 Interface Reference for SAAL Tracing 

This section describes the interface reference for the SAAL tracing.

Field Description

Link Number Indicates the link number of the SAAL

messages to be traced.

Trace Message Type This parameter can be set to Select All, Clear

All, and Custom.

Autosave Select Autosave, and the reported messages

are automatically saved in the default path.

You may also specify the path for saving the

reported messages.

 

9.14.6 Interface Reference for User Tracing 

This section describes the interface reference for user tracing.

Table 9-1 describes parameter settings in the Basic tab page.

Table 9-1 Interface reference in the Basic tab page

Field Description

Trace Method

Configuration

Select CRNCID, Chain Time, or IMSI.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

Page 110: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 110/204

Field Description

Parameter 

Configuration

Specify the CRNCID if the CRNCID tracing method is selected.

Specify the tracing duration, number of users to be traced, tracing start

time, and tracing end time if the Chain Time tracing method is selected.

The tracing duration ranges from 0 to 60 and its default value is 60.

The default tracing start time and tracing end time are current time.

Specify the IMSI if the IMSI tracing method is selected.

AutoSave The traced messages are automatically saved in the specified folder if 

this field is selected.

 

Table 9-2 describes parameter settings in the IUB tab page.

Table 9-2 Interface reference in the IUB tab page

Field Description

Trace item Select items to be traced on the Iub interface.

Parameter Set parameters based on the tracing items of the message type.

 

Table 9-3 describes parameter settings in the UU tab page.

Table 9-3 Interface reference in the UU tab page

Field Description

Trace Item Select items to be traced on the Uu interface.

Parameter Set parameters based on the tracing items of the message type.

 

9.14.7 Interface Reference for Cell Tracing This section describes the interface reference for cell tracing.

Field Name Notes

Cell ID The ID of the cell to be traced.

Tracing Type This can be set to Cell or All Uses.

Information

Level

This can be set to Key Information and Detail Information.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

Page 111: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 111/204

Field Name Notes

Autosave Select Autosave to automatically save the tracing results to a specified

folder.

 

9.14.8 Interface Reference for PPP Tracing 

This section describes the interface reference for the PPP tracing.

Field Description

Cabinet No. The value range is from 0 to 7.

Subrack No. The value range is from 0 to 1.

Slot No. The value range is from 0 to 7.

SubBoardType Indicates the type of the subboard of which

the PPP messages are traced.

PPP LinkNo. The value range is from 0 to 15.

Direction This parameter can be set to Receive, Send,

and RS.

Autosave When Autosave is selected, the messages are

automatically saved in the default path.

 

9.14.9 Interface Reference for MP Tracing 

This section describes the interface reference for the MP tracing.

Field Description

Cabinet No. Indicates the cabinet number of the board of  

which the MP messages are traced.

Subrack No. Indicates the subrack number of the board of  

which the MP messages are traced.

Slot No. Indicates the slot number of the board of  

which the MP messages are traced.

SubBoardType E1Boardis selected automatically.

MpGroupNo Indicates the number of the MP group to be

traced.

Direction This parameter can be set to Receive, Send,

and RS.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

Page 112: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 112/204

Field Description

Autosave When Autosave is selected, the messages are

automatically saved in the default path. You

can also specify another path for saving the

reported messages.

 

9.14.10 Interface Reference for MAC Tracing 

This section describes the interface reference for the MAC tracing.

Field Name Notes

Cabinet No. Cabinet number of the board in which the MAC messages are

traced.

Subrack No. Subrack number of the board in which the MAC messages are

traced.

Slot No. Slot number of the board in which the MAC messages are traced.

Direction This can be set to Out, In, or Both.

VLAN Tag VLAN Tag can be set to Tagged and Untagged.

VLANID This parameter is valid only when VLAN Tag is set to Tagged.

Value range: 1 to 4094.

VLAN Priority This parameter is valid only when VLAN Tag is set to Tagged.

VLAN Priority can be set to All, or 0 to 7.

Local MAC Address The format is ##-##-##-##-##-##, and Local MAC Address is not

set by default.

Peer MAC Address The format is ##-##-##-##-##-##, and Peer MAC Address is not

set by default.

Frame Type Frame Type can be set to All, ARP, RARP, IP, 802.1ag, or 

802.3ah.

Frame Flow Upper Threshold

This specifies the maximum number of frames allowed to bereported in one second.

Value range: 10 to 200. Default value: 10.

Minimum Frame

Length

This specifies the minimum length of the frame that can be

obtained. The minimum frame length must be shorter than the

maximum frame length.

Value range: 16 to 1518. Default value: 16.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

Page 113: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 113/204

Field Name Notes

Maximum Frame

Length

This specifies the maximum length of the frame that can be

obtained. The maximum frame length must be longer than the

minimum frame length.

Value range: 16 to 1518. Default value: 1518.

Intercept Select This specifies whether the message is reported after intercept

selection.

Intercept Select can be set to Intercept Length Appointed or 

Intercept Length Not Appointed.

Intercept Length This specifies the intercept length of the reported message.

This parameter is valid only when Intercept Select is set to

Intercept Length Appointed.

Value range: 42 to 1518. Default value: 74. Unit: byte.

Autosave Select this check box to automatically save the tracing results to a

specified folder.

 

9.14.11 Interface Reference for PTP Tracing 

This section describes the interface reference for the PTP tracing.

Field Name Notes

Cabinet No. Cabinet number of the board in which the PTP

messages are traced.

Subrack No. Subrack number of the board in which the

PTP messages are traced.

Slot No. Slot number of the board in which the PTP

messages are traced.

PTP clock link No. PTP clock link number of the board in which

the PTP messages are traced.

Autosave Select this check box to automatically save

the tracing results to a specified folder.

 

9.14.12 Interface Reference for Trace Viewer

This section describes the interface reference for the trace viewer.

Right-click in the Trace Viewer window, the shortcut menu is displayed. Table 9-4 lists the

function reference.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

Page 114: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 114/204

Table 9-4 Interface reference for the shortcut menu

Field Description

Save All

Messages

Messages are saved in .tmf or .txt format.

Save Selected

Messages

Selected messages are saved in .tmf or .txt format.

Select Left Side

to Compare

List the selected messages on the left.

Compare Compare the selected messages. (This is valid only when you select two

or more messages.)

Undo

Comparison

Cancel the comparison between the selected messages.

Filter Filter the messages according to the field, type, algorithm, and filtering

 parameters. The filtered messages are not displayed in the browse

window.

Filter By column Display only the messages in the selected columns.

Undo Filtering Cancel the filtering. Display all messages.

Find Search for messages that satisfy the conditions in terms of type, content,

matching mode, and searching direction.

Properties The properties of Trace Viewer. These include save type, file name, user 

name, office name, task type, and creation time of the task.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 9 Managing the Interface Tracings

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

Page 115: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 115/204

10 Managing NodeB Common Monitoring 

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to monitor the CPU/DSP occupancy of the NodeB. It consists of the

following tasks: displaying the CPU/DSP occupancy of the NodeB, browsing and saving

monitoring files. It is useful for reviewing system resources.

10.1 Displaying the NodeB CPU/DSP Usage

This section describes how to display the NodeB CPU/DSP usage. CPU/DSP usage reflects the

use of system resources.

10.2 Saving NodeB Monitoring Files

Users can save CPU/DSP usage in files to the LMT PC after creating or starting a CPU/DSP

usage monitoring task. This section describes how to save NodeB monitoring files.

10.3 Browsing a NodeB CPU/DSP Monitoring File Offline

This section describes how to use the Monitor Viewer to browse offline monitoring messages

saved in .tmf format.

10.4 Interface Reference for Managing NodeB Common Monitoring

This section describes the interface reference for NodeB common monitoring.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 10 Managing NodeB Common Monitoring

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

Page 116: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 116/204

10.1 Displaying the NodeB CPU/DSP Usage

This section describes how to display the NodeB CPU/DSP usage. CPU/DSP usage reflects theuse of system resources.

Prerequisite

You have logged in to the NodeB LMT.

Context

Results of the CPU usage test are as follows:

l When the NodeB works properly and does not carry any services, the CPU usage of all

 boards should stay between 5% and 10%.

l When the NodeB carries services, the CPU usage of all boards increases to less than 75%.

If the CPU usage increases to more than 75%, the alarm is raised.

l It is normal for the CPU usage to stay at 100% for a few seconds.

l If 100% of CPU usage lasts longer, the CPU may be faulty. For example, the CPU is faulty

if usage lasts over one minute even though the NodeB does not carry service.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Double-click Common Monitoring > CPU/DSP Usage. The system displays the CPU/DSP

Usage window in the right pane and the Add Task  dialog box.

NOTE

The CPU/DSP Usage window consists of two parts. The top part contains two tab pages, displaying the

monitoring result in List and Chart. The bottom part of window displays the lists of all monitored tasks.

For the detail of the shortcut menu operation in the CPU/DSP Usage window, see 10.4.2 Interface

Reference for CPU/DSP Usage Monitoring.

For the parameter details in the Add Task  dialog box, see 10.4.1 Interface Reference for

Adding a Monitoring Task .

Step 3 Set the query conditions in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Add to add a monitored task with the specified query conditions.

Step 5 Click Close to close the Add Task  dialog box and return to the CPU/DSP Usage window.CPU/

DSP usage is displayed by list and chart.

NOTE

For ease of differentiation, different colors are used to represent different tasks.

Step 6 To end the task, choose one of the following methods:

l Method 1: Directly close the task monitoring window to end all monitoring tasks of the active

window.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 10 Managing NodeB Common Monitoring

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

Page 117: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 117/204

l Method 2: Right-click the task in the task list below the graph area and then choose Delete

Task  from the shortcut menu.

----End

10.2 Saving NodeB Monitoring Files

Users can save CPU/DSP usage in files to the LMT PC after creating or starting a CPU/DSP

usage monitoring task. This section describes how to save NodeB monitoring files.

Context

l When the current monitoring file exceeds the system limit, a new monitoring file is created.

All files of one monitoring task are associated by indexes. The index value increases as the

number of new monitoring files grows.

l Default save path: LMT installation directory\client\output\monitor.l Default file name: Cpu Review_YYYY-MM-DD_HH-MM-SS-Index.

l The file is automatically saved in .mrf format.

NOTE

l YYYY-MM-DD_HH-MM-SS represents the task creation time. YYYY, MM, DD, HH, MM and SS

stand for year, month, day, hour, minute, and second respectively.

l Indexes include multiple monitoring files within a monitoring task. The first file has no index value.

The index values of the files (except the first file) start from 1 in an ascending order.

Procedure

l To save the monitoring result when the monitoring task is created, perform the following

steps:

1. Open the Add Task  dialog box.

For the parameter details in the Add Task  dialog box, see 10.4.1 Interface Reference

for Adding a Monitoring Task .

2. Select the corresponding Cabinet No.Subrack No. and Slot No.. Then, click Add to

create a monitoring task.

3. Specify the path for saving monitoring files. The default save path is installation

directory\client\output\monitor.

4. Click Start Saving to start saving the result in real time.NOTE

Click Stop Saving to stop the saving.

l To save the monitoring result when the CPU/DSP usage monitoring task is started, perform

the following steps:

1. Right-click in the task information pane at the bottom of the CPU/DSP Usage

window.

For the detail of other shortcut menu operations in the CPU/DSP Usage window, see

10.4.2 Interface Reference for CPU/DSP Usage Monitoring.

2. Select Start Saving Review Data in the displayed shortcut menu to start saving thereal-time results.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 10 Managing NodeB Common Monitoring

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

Page 118: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 118/204

NOTE

During the saving progress, click Stop Saving Review Data to terminate the saving task.

----End

10.3 Browsing a NodeB CPU/DSP Monitoring File Offline

This section describes how to use the Monitor Viewer to browse offline monitoring messages

saved in .tmf format.

Prerequisite

Monitoring files are saved.

Procedure

Step 1 Select any of the following methods to start the Monitor Viewer:

l Method 1: On the LMT, select View > Monitor Viewer.

l Method 2: On the LMT, click on the toolbar.

l Method 3: Select Start > All Programs > HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal >

Monitor Viewer. The Open dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Select the monitoring file to be browsed in the dialog box.

Step 3Click Open or double-click the file. The Monitor Viewer window displays the result data in

list or in chart.

Step 4 Click the List tab or the Chart tab to review the information in different modes.

Step 5 To review other saved results, select File > Open. In the Open dialog box, select and open files

to read the monitoring messages that are saved in the files.

----End

10.4 Interface Reference for Managing NodeB Common

Monitoring This section describes the interface reference for NodeB common monitoring.

10.4.1 Interface Reference for Adding a Monitoring Task

This section provides the interface reference for adding a monitoring task.

Field Description

Cabinet No. Number of the Cabinet to be monitored:

Baseband subrack number, or the Subrack number of the RRU.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 10 Managing NodeB Common Monitoring

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

Page 119: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 119/204

Field Description

Subrack No. Number of the subrack to be monitored:

Baseband subrack number, or the Subrack number of the RRU.

Slot No. Number of the slot to be monitored:

The slot number of the RRU, or the board in the baseband

subrack.

Show line graph or 

histogram

If this check box is selected, the monitoring results are

displayed on the chart tab page.

Save Review Data In this area, the monitoring data is saved to an .mrf file.

 

10.4.2 Interface Reference for CPU/DSP Usage Monitoring This section describes the parameters used for CPU/DSP usage monitoring.

Right-click on the List tab page in the CPU/DSP Usage window. Then you can perform the

following operations through the shortcut menu:

l Sets auto scroll

l Sets display properties

Right-click on the Chart tab page in the CPU/DSP Usage window. Then you can perform the

following operations through the shortcut menu:

l Sets auto scroll

l Switches the display mode

l Shows or hiding grid

l Sets Y axis display range

Right-click in the task information pane at the bottom of the CPU/DSP Usage window. Then

you can perform the following operations through the shortcut menu:

l Adds a task 

l Deletes a task 

l Starts saving review data

l Stops saving review data

l Sets display properties

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 10 Managing NodeB Common Monitoring

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

Page 120: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 120/204

Page 121: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 121/204

Page 122: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 122/204

11.2 Managing the BootROM Software of the NodeB

This section describes how to manage the BootROM software by upgrading the software of all

the boards of the NodeB.

Context

NOTE

l Downloading the BootROM and activating the BootROM are integrated into one step. You can

 perform the two in one operation.

l The NodeB does not reset after the BootROM is upgraded, nor does it affect services. Therefore, it

is unnecessary to manually reset the NodeB or board to make the BootROM software effective after 

the upgrade. The NodeB starts the upgraded BootROM during the next resetting of NodeB or boards.

11.2.1 Downloading  the NodeB BootROMThis section describes how to download the NodeB BootROM software from the FTP server to

the temporary directory on the main processing board and then to the related boards.

Prerequisite

l The FTP server works properly and is correctly connected to the NodeB in the same intranet.

l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the NodeB.

l The FTP user can access the specified directory.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Double-click Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog box

is displayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating

the Software.

Step 3 Select Upgrade BootROM in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Upgrade BootROM dialog box is displayed.

For the Upgrade BootROM dialog box reference, see 11.7.7 Interface Reference for

Upgrading BootROM.

Step 5 Click Modify and set the FTP server in the FTP Setting dialog box.

For the details of the FTP Setting dialog box, see 11.7.11 Interface Reference for Setting FTP

Server.

Step 6 Click OK . The FTP Setting dialog box is closed and the Upgrade BootROM dialog box is

displayed.

Step 7 Select Download BootROM Package and then specify a path to download the BootROM package.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

Page 123: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 123/204

NOTE

l The system downloads the BootROM package and then activates it.

l You can select one step each time and the system proceeds with the task you customize.

Step 8 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 9 Click Yes. The Upgrading Patch Progress dialog box is displayed. The status and progress of 

the patch upgrade is displayed in the dialog box. You may check the process by viewing this

dialog box.

----End

11.2.2 Activating the NodeB BootROM

This section describes how to activate the NodeB BootROM. During activation, the main

 processing board sends update commands to all the boards that successfully download the

BootROM software.

Context

l Before the activation, the system checks the BootROM versions of the boards. It activates

the board BootROM only when there is an upgraded BootROM version.

l As the BootROM does not affect NodeB services, reset of the NodeB is not required. The

 NodeB starts with the upgraded BootROM during next reset.

l After the BootROM is activated, the NodeB is not reset.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenancetab.

Step 2 Double-click Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog box

is displayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating

the Software.

Step 3 Select Upgrade BootROM in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Upgrade BootROM dialog box is displayed.

For the Upgrade BootROM dialog box reference, see 11.7.7 Interface Reference for

Upgrading BootROM.

Step 5 Select Activate BootROM.

NOTE

l The system downloads the BootROM package and then activates it.

l You can select one step at a time. The system proceeds with the task you customize.

Step 6 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 7 Click Yes. The Upgrading Patch Progress dialog box is displayed. The status and progress of 

the patch upgrade is displayed in the dialog box. You may check the process by viewing this

dialog box.

----End

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

Page 124: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 124/204

11.3 Upgrading the NodeB Software

This section describes how to upgrade the NodeB software from a previous version to a new

version. Before beginning the upgrade, record details of the previous version and download

software for the upgrade.

Prerequisite

l Upgrading BootROM is complete.

l The LMT has already been upgraded to the corresponding version to the NodeB software

version.

Context

l If upgrading the NodeB software fails, roll back to the previous software version of 

 NodeB. The version rollback procedure for the NodeB is the same as that for activating the

 NodeB software. The difference is that you have to select the software version of the

 NodeB before the upgraded version.

l The system integrates Backing up the NodeB Data Configuration File, Downloading the

 NodeB Software, and Activating the NodeB Software into one dialog box. You can select

all three options to perform the three steps in a time.

11.3.1 Downloading the NodeB Software

This section describes how to download the NodeB software from the FTP server to the

 NodeB. The NodeB file directories are the active directory and the standby directory. The active

directory saves the running NodeB software version. The standby directory saves the inactive NodeB software version. After the NodeB software is downloaded, it is saved in the standby

directory. The NodeB software does not take effect immediately or damage the running software.

Prerequisite

l The FTP server works properly and is correctly connected to the NodeB in the same intranet.

l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the NodeB.

l The FTP user can access the specified directory.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

Tab.

Step 2 Select Software Management > Software Update. The Software Upgrade dialog box is

displayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating

the Software.

Step 3 Select Upgrade NodeB Software in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Upgrade NodeB Software dialog box is displayed.

For the Upgrade NodeB Software dialog box reference, see 11.7.5 Interface Reference forUpgrading NodeB Software.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

Page 125: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 125/204

Step 5 Click Modify, and set the FTP server in the FTP Setting dialog box.

For the details of the FTP Setting dialog box, see 11.7.11 Interface Reference for Setting FTP

Server.

Step 6 Click OK . The FTP Setting dialog box is closed and the Upgrade NodeB Software dialog boxis displayed.

Step 7 Select Backup Data Configuration File, Download NodeB Software Package, and

Download by Configuration to specify a directory for backing up the file and a directory for 

downloading the NodeB software package.

NOTE

l Backup Data Configuration File is optional. It is recommended that you select the option.

l When the configuration and initial configuration changes or the configuration file encounters an error,

click Download Data Configuration File to download the data configuration file again. Then, click 

Effective Data Configuration File to confirm its validity before activating the NodeB software.

l It is recommended that you select Download by Configuration. If it is not selected, a dialog box isdisplayed to note this may cause the software download to fail. Click OK  to start the download of the

software. Click Cancel to review selections.

l When downloading by configuration, only required board software packages are downloaded. This

reduces the total volume of data to be downloaded, shortens the download time, and saves storage space

on the NodeB.

Step 8 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 9 Click Yes. The upgrade progress dialog box is displayed. The status and progress of the patch

upgrade is displayed in the dialog box.

----End

11.3.2 Supplying the NodeB Software

Supplying the NodeB software means manually downloading the software of the board that is

newly added and is in position.

Prerequisite

l The NodeB software package file is already saved in the source path.

l The FTP server works properly and is correctly connected to the NodeB in the same intranet.

l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the NodeB.l The FTP user can access the specified directory.

Context

When downloading the NodeB software, select Download by Configuration. Then, the

 NodeB can automatically download the required board software in the case of any change in the

 NodeB configuration (for example, a board is added) from the following two paths:

l The last download path of the active NodeB software package

l The M2000 server 

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

Page 126: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 126/204

NOTE

After the board software is automatically downloaded, it is automatically activated.

If the board software fails to be downloaded automatically, the NodeB reports a Board Version

Mismatch alarm, which indicates that you need to manually download the board software. The manually

downloaded board software is stored in the active directory of the NodeB. Then, you need to run the ACTSOFTWARE command to activate the board software.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Select Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog box is

displayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating

the Software.

Step 3 Select Supply NodeB Software in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Supply NodeB Software dialog box is displayed.

For the Supply NodeB Softwaredialog box reference, see 11.7.2 Interface Reference for

Supplying NodeB Software.

Step 5 Click Modify, and set the FTP server in the FTP Setting dialog box.

For the details of the FTP Setting dialog box, see 11.7.11 Interface Reference for Setting FTP

Server.

Step 6 Click OK . The FTP Setting dialog box is closed and the Supply NodeB Software dialog box

is displayed.

Step 7 Click Browse on the right of Software Directory and specify a directory for downloading the

software package.

If you have or know the specific path of the NodeB cold patch, select this Supplying Patch

Software check box and specify the path in the Patch Directory.

Step 8 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 9 Click Yes. The status and progress of the process are displayed in the dialog box. You may check 

the process by viewing this dialog box.

----End

11.3.3 Activating the NodeB Software

This section describes how to switch the standby directory to the active one, and then download

the NodeB software to each board to validate it. You can activate the NodeB software right after 

the download, or later on. After the activation, the NodeB is reset and services are disrupted.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Double-click Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog boxis displayed.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

Page 127: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 127/204

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating

the Software.

Step 3 Select Upgrade NodeB Software in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Upgrade NodeB Software dialog box is displayed.For the Upgrade NodeB Software dialog box reference, see 11.7.5 Interface Reference for

Upgrading NodeB Software.

Step 5 Select Activate NodeB Software and select the NodeB software version to be upgraded in the

Version box.

NOTE

l The Version box is displayed only when Download NodeB Software is not selected.

l When the configuration and initial configuration changes or the configuration file encounters an error,

click Download Data Configuration File to download the data configuration file again. Then, click 

Effective Data Configuration File to confirm its validity before activating the NodeB software.

Step 6 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 7 Click Yes. The Upgrading Patch Progress dialog box is displayed, showing the status and

 progress of the patch upgrade.

NOTE

l The NodeB is reset and the new NodeB software version is started when NodeB software is activated.

l Reactivate the NodeB software version in the standby file directory or reinstall the NodeB software

upon activation failure.

CAUTION

l Resetting of the NodeB will reset all boards, and services will be disrupted. You must restart

the NodeB.

l When the multi-mode base station works in co-module mode, resetting the TRX module

interrupts the services of the other mode.

l When the multi-mode base station supports co-transmission through ports on a board working

in UMTS mode, resetting the board where ports shared by both modes interrupts the services

of the other mode.

----End

11.3.4 Activating Board Software

This section describes how to activate the software on a single board or a type of boards. The

target version of the software to be activated is the relevant version in the active file directory.

Context

Activate the board software in the following cases:

l A single board or a type of boards fails to be activated during the NodeB software activation.

l

A single board or a type of boards is added or replaced after the NodeB software activation,which cause failure in automatic activation.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

Page 128: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 128/204

CAUTION

l Activating board software results the board to reset.

l When the multi-mode base station works in co-module mode, resetting the TRX moduleinterrupts the services of the other mode.

l When the multi-mode base station supports co-transmission through ports on a board

working in UMTS mode, resetting the board where ports shared by both modes interrupts

the services of the other mode.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Double-click Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog boxis displayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating

the Software.

Step 3 Select Activate Board in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Activate Board dialog box is displayed.

For the Activate Boarddialog box reference, see 11.7.4 Interface Reference for Activating

Board Software

Step 5 In the dialog box, select A type of boards or Single board.

NOTE

If you select Single board, you must specify Cabinet No., Subrack No. and Slot No..

Step 6 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 7 Click Yes. The Upgrading Patch Progress dialog box is displayed. The status and progress of 

the patch upgrade is displayed in the dialog box. You may check the process by viewing this

dialog box.

----End

11.3.5 Synchronizing Software Versions of the NodeB

This section describes how to synchronize software versions of the NodeB. It refers to the backupof the activated NodeB software and BootROM software in the standby directory after the

upgraded NodeB software runs successfully for 2-3 days. In this case, the version in the standby

directory can be used should the NodeB software and the BootROM software in the active

directory become faulty.

Procedure

l GUI mode:

1. In the navigation pane of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the

Maintenance tab.

2. Double-click Software Management > Software Update. The Software Updatedialog box is displayed.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

Page 129: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 129/204

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for

Updating the Software.

3. Select Synchronize Version in the dialog box.

4. Click Next. The Synchronize Version dialog box is displayed.

For the Synchronize Versiondialog box reference, see11.7.3 Interface Reference

for Synchronizing Version

5. Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

6. Click Yes. The Synchronizing Version Progress dialog box is displayed, showing

the status and progress of synchronization.

l MML mode:

Run the command SYN SOFTWARE.

----End

11.4 Managing the NodeB Cold Patch

This section describes how to use the patch package to upgrade a specified board or module on

the NodeB for optimizing a function or clearing a defect. Services on the board are interrupted,

as patching results in a board reset.

11.4.1 Downloading the NodeB Cold Patch

This section describes how to download a patch package from the FTP server to the NodeB. The

 patch package is stored in the standby file directory of the NodeB.

Prerequisite

l The FTP server works properly and is correctly connected to the NodeB in the same intranet.

l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the NodeB.

l The FTP user can access the specified directory.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Double-click Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog box

is displayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating

the Software.

Step 3 Select Upgrade Patch in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Upgrade Patch dialog box is displayed.

For the Upgrade Patch dialog box reference, see 11.7.8 Interface Reference for Upgrading

Patch.

Step 5 Click Modify, and set the FTP server in the FTP Setting dialog box.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

Page 130: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 130/204

For the details of the FTP Setting dialog box, see 11.7.11 Interface Reference for Setting FTP

Server.

Step 6 Click OK . The FTP Setting dialog box is closed and the Upgrade Patch dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 Select Download Patch Software Package to specify a directory for downloading the patch package.

NOTE

The system downloads the patch package and then activates it.

Step 8 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 9 Click Yes. The Upgrading Patch Progress dialog box is displayed. The status and progress of 

the patch upgrade is displayed in the dialog box. You may check the process by viewing this

dialog box.

----End

11.4.2 Supplying the NodeB Cold Patch

This section describes how to supply the NodeB software. Supplying the NodeB software means

manually downloading the software of the board that is newly added and is in position.

Prerequisite

l The running software version of NodeB is the cold patch version.

l The FTP server works properly and is connected to the NodeB in the same intranet.

l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the NodeB.

lThe FTP user can access the specified directory.

Context

By default, the NodeB cold patch is downloaded by configuration. If the NodeB configuration

changes (for example, a new board is added), the NodeB download the required board software

and cold patch software from the last default download path.

NOTE

After the board software and cold patch software are automatically downloaded, they take effect immediately

without being activated. If the automatic downloading fails, the NodeB reports the Board Software Auto-Supply

Failure alarm for you to manually download the board software and cold patch software. Then you can supply

the NodeB software by downloading the available new board software. After the software is automaticallydownloaded, perform 11.3.4 Activating Board Software to validate the software.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane, click the Maintenance Tab.

Step 2 Double-click Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog box

is displayed.

Step 3 Select Supply NodeB Software.

Step 4 Click Next. The Supply NodeB Software dialog box is displayed.

Table 11-1 describes the fields in the Supply NodeB Software dialog box.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

Page 131: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 131/204

Table 11-1 Fields in the Supply NodeB Software dialog box

Field Name Notes

FTP Setting This enables you to set the FTP server for downloading the

 NodeB software and cold patch software.Click Modify on the right to set the FTP server.

Software Directory This specifies the path that stores the NodeB software package.

Click Browse and select a directory for the software package.

Patch Directory This specifies the path that stores the NodeB cold patch.

Click Browse and select a directory for the cold patch.

 

Step 5 The FTP server is set up on the M2000.

1. Click Modify. In the FTP Setting dialog box, set the FTP server.

For the details of the FTP Setting dialog box, see 11.7.11 Interface Reference for Setting

FTP Server.

2. Click OK .

Step 6 Specify a path to download the software package. ClickBrowse on the right and select a directory

for the software package.

Step 7 Select Supplying Patch Software.

Step 8 Specify a path to download the cold patch software package. Click Browse on the right and

select a directory for the cold patch software package.

Step 9 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 10 Click Yes. The Upgrading Patch Progress dialog box is displayed. The status and progress of 

the patch upgrade is displayed in the dialog box. You may check the process by viewing this

dialog box.

----End

11.4.3 Activating NodeB Cold Patch

This section describes how to activate the NodeB cold patch. Activating the NodeB cold patch

means downloading the patch in the standby file directory to the target board and updating the

 patch version of the target boar d.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

Page 132: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 132/204

Context

CAUTION

l Activating cold patch leads to the reset of the related board. Therefore, services on that board

are disrupted.

l When the multi-mode base station works in co-module mode, resetting the TRX module

interrupts the services of the other mode.

l When the multi-mode base station supports co-transmission through ports on a board working

in UMTS mode, resetting the board where ports shared by both modes interrupts the services

of the other mode.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Double-click Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog box

is displayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating

the Software.

Step 3 Select Upgrade Patch in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Upgrade Patch dialog box is displayed.

For the Upgrade Patch dialog box reference, see 11.7.8 Interface Reference for Upgrading

Patch.

Step 5 Select Activate Patch.

NOTE

The system downloads the patch package and then activates it.

Step 6 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 7 Click Yes. The Upgrading Patch Progress dialog box is displayed. The status and progress of 

the patch upgrade is displayed in the dialog box. You may check the process by viewing this

dialog box.

NOTE

If the activation of a board fails, locate the problem. After the fault is cleared, the cold patch is automatically

loaded to the board.

----End

11.4.4 Downloading the Cold Patch for the NodeB BootROM

This section describes how to download the cold patch for the NodeB BootROM from the FTP

server to the NodeB. The patch package is saved in the standby file directory of the NodeB.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

Page 133: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 133/204

Prerequisite

l The FTP server works properly and is correctly connected to the NodeB in the same intranet.

l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the NodeB.

lThe FTP user can access the specified directory.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Double-click Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog box

is displayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating

the Software.

Step 3 Select Upgrade Patch in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Upgrade Patch dialog box is displayed.

For the Upgrade Patch dialog box reference, see 11.7.8 Interface Reference for Upgrading

Patch.

Step 5 Click Modify, and set the FTP server in the FTP Setting dialog box.

For the details of the FTP Setting dialog box, see 11.7.11 Interface Reference for Setting FTP

Server.

Step 6 Click OK . The FTP Setting dialog box is closed and the Upgrade Patch dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 Select Download Patch Software Package to specify a directory for downloading the patch package.

NOTE

l The system downloads the patch package and then activates it.

l If you select Download by Configuration, all the board software required according to the current

 NodeB configuration is downloaded.

Step 8 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 9 Click Yes. The Upgrading Patch Progress dialog box is displayed. The status and progress of 

the patch upgrade is displayed in the dialog box. You may check the process by viewing this

dialog box.

----End

11.4.5 Activating the Cold Patch for the NodeB BootROM

This section describes how to activate the cold patch for the NodeB BootROM. Activating the

cold patch for the NodeB BootROM means downloading the BootROM patch that is saved in

the NodeB patch area to the target board and updating the patch version of the target board.

Prerequisite

l You have logged in to the NodeB LMT.

l The cold patch for the BootROM is downloaded.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

Page 134: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 134/204

Page 135: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 135/204

Step 2 Double-click Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog box

is displayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating

the Software.

Step 3 Select Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch dialog box is displayed.

For the Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch dialog box reference, see 11.7.9 Interface Reference for

Upgrading NodeB Hot Patch.

Step 5 Click Modify in the dialog box, and set the FTP server in the FTP Setting dialog box.

For the details of the FTP Setting dialog box, see 11.7.11 Interface Reference for Setting FTP

Server.

Step 6 Click OK . The FTP Setting dialog box is closed and the Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch dialog

 box is displayed.

Step 7 Select Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch to specify a directory for downloading the hot patch package.

NOTE

The above steps are performed in order to: Download Hot Patch Software Package, Activate Hot Patch,

and then Confirm Hot Patch.

Step 8 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 9 Click Yes. The Upgrading Patch Progress dialog box is displayed. The status and progress of 

the patch upgrade is displayed in the dialog box. You may check the process by viewing this

dialog box.

----End

11.5.2 Activating the NodeB Hot Patch

This section describes how to activate the NodeB hot patch. Activating the NodeB hot patch

means downloading the patch in the standby file directory on the main controlling board to the

target board and updating the patch version of the target board.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Double-click Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog box

is displayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating

the Software.

Step 3 Select Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch dialog box is displayed.

For the Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch dialog box reference, see 11.7.9 Interface Reference for

Upgrading NodeB Hot Patch.

Step 5 Select Activate Hot Patch.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

Page 136: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 136/204

NOTE

The steps above are performed in order: download hot patch software package, activate hot patch, and then

confirm hot patch.

Step 6Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 7 Click Yes. The Upgrading Patch Progress dialog box is displayed. The status and progress of 

the patch upgrade is displayed in the dialog box. You may check the process by viewing this

dialog box.

NOTE

If the activation of a board fails, locate the problem and then activate the hot patch of that board again.

----End

11.5.3 Confirming the NodeB Hot Patch

This section describes how to confirm the NodeB hot patch. The activated NodeB hot patch

running on the board is still in trial state. After a period of trial running, you can confirm the

 NodeB hot patch to enable its stable running if the patch is running properly.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Double-click Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog box

is displayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updatingthe Software.

Step 3 Select Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch dialog box is displayed.

For the Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch dialog box reference, see 11.7.9 Interface Reference for

Upgrading NodeB Hot Patch.

Step 5 Select Confirm Hot Patch.

NOTE

The steps above are performed in order: download hot patch software package, activate hot patch, and thenconfirm hot patch.

Step 6 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 7 Click Yes. The Upgrading Patch Progress dialog box is displayed. The status and progress of 

the patch upgrade is displayed in the dialog box. You may check the process by viewing this

dialog box.

NOTE

If the confirmation of a board fails, locate the problem and then confirm the hot patch of that board again.

After confirming the NodeB hot patch, you cannot deactivate the hot patches.

----End

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

Page 137: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 137/204

11.5.4 Deactivating the NodeB Hot Patch

This section describes how to deactivate the NodeB hot patch. The activated NodeB hot patch

running on the board is still in trial state. After a period of trial running, you can deactivate the

 NodeB hot patch to stop the trial running if an exception occurs.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Double-click Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog box

is displayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating

the Software.

Step 3 Select Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch dialog box is displayed.

For the Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch dialog box reference, see 11.7.9 Interface Reference for

Upgrading NodeB Hot Patch.

Step 5 Select Deactivate Hot Patch.

Step 6 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 7 Click Yes. The Upgrading Patch Progress dialog box is displayed. The status and progress of 

the patch upgrade is displayed in the dialog box. You may check the process by viewing this

dialog box.

NOTE

If the deactivation of a board fails, locate the problem and then deactivate the hot patch of that board again.

----End

11.5.5 Removing the NodeB Hot Patch

This section describes how to remove the NodeB hot patch that is deactivated, activated, or 

running.

Context

After the hot patch is removed, the NodeB hot patch file is removed from the standby directoryand active directory. You need to download the hot patch again to perform such operations as

activating the patch.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Double-click Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog box

is displayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updatingthe Software.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

Page 138: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 138/204

Step 3 Select Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch dialog box is displayed.

For the Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch dialog box reference, see 11.7.9 Interface Reference for

Upgrading NodeB Hot Patch.

Step 5 Select Remove Hot Patch.

Step 6 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 7 Click Yes. The Upgrading Patch Progress dialog box is displayed. The status and progress of 

the patch upgrade is displayed in the dialog box. You may check the process by viewing this

dialog box.

NOTE

If you cannot remove the boards, locate the problem and then try to remove the hot patch of that board

again.

----End

11.5.6 Rolling Back the NodeB Hot Patch

This section describes how to roll back the NodeB hot patch. Rolling back the hot patch means

recovering the status of the activated hot patch before the latest loading.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Select Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog box isdisplayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating

the Software.

Step 3 Select Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch dialog box is displayed.

For the Upgrade NodeB Hot Patch dialog box reference, see 11.7.9 Interface Reference for

Upgrading NodeB Hot Patch.

Step 5 Select Roll Back Hot Patch.

Step 6 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 7 Click Yes. A dialog box is displayed, showing the status and progress of the patch rollback.

Check whether the operation is successfully complete.

NOTE

l When you perform the rollback operation, the currently used hot patch stops running and the last

activated version comes into use again. In addition, the reused hot patch should keep the state (active

or running) the same as that before the last upgrade.

l If no hot patch is activated on the network element before, perform the rollback operation to delete the

currently used hot patch.

l The hot patch can be rolled back only once.

----End

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

Page 139: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 139/204

11.6 Managing the Multi-Version Software of the NodeB

This section describes how to manage the NodeB combined software, permitting the upgrade of 

two or more software versions at one time.

Context

The upgrading multi-version software of the NodeB is applied in the case of upgrading two or 

more than two software versions at a time. The upgrading of multi-version software can be

applied in the following scenarios:

Serial No. Multi-version software upgrade

1 NodeB software + Cold patch software

2 NodeB software + Hot patch software

3 Cold patch software + Hot patch software

4 NodeB software + Cold patch software + Hot patch software

 

The downloading and activating of multi-version software can be performed independently. The

activation of software may lead to the NodeB resetting and service interruption. You can

download the software in daytime, and activate the software in a time with least traffic at night.

CAUTION

The upgrade of the multi-version software can be performed when the versions of the NodeB

software, cold path software, and hot patch software are matching with each other. Otherwise,

error information The selected software version cannot be used together is displayed.

11.6.1 Downloading the Multi-Version Software of the NodeB

This section describes how to download the multi-version software of the NodeB, which refers

to download the NodeB software, cold patch software, or hot patch software to be upgraded

from the FTP server to the standby directory of the NodeB file.

Prerequisite

l The FTP server works properly and is connected to the NodeB in the same intranet.

l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the NodeB.

l The FTP user can access the specified directory.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

Page 140: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 140/204

Context

CAUTION

The multi-version software can be downloaded when the version of the NodeB software, cold

 path software, and hot patch software are matching with each other. Otherwise, error information

The selected software version cannot be used together is displayed.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane, click the Maintenance tab.

Step 2 Double-click Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog box

is displayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating

the Software.

Step 3 Select Upgrade multi-version software in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Upgrade multi-version software dialog box is displayed.

For the parameter details in the Upgrade multi-version software dialog box, see 11.7.10

Interface Reference for Upgrading Multi-Version Software.

Step 5 Set the FTP server.

1. Click Modify. In the FTP Setting dialog box, set the FTP server.

For the details of the FTP Setting dialog box, see 11.7.11 Interface Reference for SettingFTP Server.

2. Click OK  to complete the FTP sever setup, and return to the Upgrade multi-version

software dialog box.

Step 6 Specify the corresponding software path according to the actual requirement of the multi-version

software to be upgraded. Click Browse on the right and select a directory for the corresponding

software package.

Step 7 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 8 Click Yes. The Upgrading Patch Progress dialog box is displayed. The status and progress of 

the patch upgrade is displayed in the dialog box. You may check the process by viewing thisdialog box.

----End

11.6.2 Activating the Multi-Version Software of the NodeB

This section describes how to switch the multi-version software of the standby directory to the

active one, and then download the multi-version software to each board and validate it. After 

the activation, the NodeB is reset and all the services are disrupted.

Prerequisite

The multi-version software of the NodeB is downloaded.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

Page 141: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 141/204

Procedure

Step 1 Click the Maintenance tab in the navigation tree.

Step 2 Select Software Management > Software Update. The Software Update dialog box is

displayed.

For the Software Update dialog box reference, see 11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating

the Software.

Step 3 Select Upgrade multi-version software in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The Upgrade multi-version software dialog box is displayed.

For the parameter details in the Upgrade multi-version software dialog box, see 11.7.10

Interface Reference for Upgrading Multi-Version Software.

Step 5 Select Act Multi-Version software in the dialog box.

Step 6 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for your confirmation.

Step 7 Click Yes. The Upgrading Patch Progress dialog box is displayed. The status and progress of 

the patch upgrade is displayed in the dialog box. You may check the process by viewing this

dialog box.

NOTE

l The NodeB is reset and the new NodeB software version is started when the multi-version software

 NodeB is activated.

l If the software activation fails, the NodeB software cannot operate properly. Roll back to the previous

software version according to the actual requirement.

CAUTION

l Resetting the NodeB leads to the resetting of all the boards in the NodeB. At the same time,

the services carried by the NodeB are disrupted. The NodeB needs to be restarted.

l When the multi-mode base station works in co-module mode, resetting the TRX module

interrupts the services of the other mode.

l When the multi-mode base station supports co-transmission through ports on a board working

in UMTS mode, resetting the board where ports shared by both modes interrupts the services

of the other mode.

----End

11.7 Interface Reference for Managing NodeB Software

This section provides interface reference for managing the software.

11.7.1 Interface Reference for Updating the Software

This section describes the interface reference for Software Update window.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

Page 142: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 142/204

Field Name Notes

Upgrading BootROM software Upgrading BootROM software includes

downloading and activating BootROM

software package.

This task includes the main operations in

upgrading BootROM software.

Upgrading NodeB software Upgrading NodeB software includes backing

up data configuration files, downloading and

activating NodeB software package.

This task includes the main operations in

upgrading NodeB software.

Supply NodeB Software Upgrading some boards' software includes

downloading and activating the boards'

software.

Upgrading patch Upgrading patch includes downloading and

activating patch software package.

This task includes all operations in upgrading

 patch.

Upgrading hot patch of NodeB Upgrading hot patch of NodeB includes

upgrading, deactivating, removing hot patch,

and rolling back hot patch.

This task includes all operations in upgrading

BootROM software.

Upgrading multi-version software Upgrading multi-version software includes

downloading the software package, cold

 patch software package, and hot patch

software package of the matching version,

and activating this version.

This task includes the operation in upgrading

the basic software version of the NodeB and

the basic software patch version of the NodeB

at a time.

Synchronize software This enables you to back up the version of the

upgraded NodeB software that runs properlyfor a period. This operation is regarded as the

last step during the whole NodeB software

upgrade procedure.

Activate board This enables you to activate the board

software and the related BootROM software.

 

11.7.2 Interface Reference for Supplying NodeB Software

This section describes the interface reference for Supplying NodeB Software dialog box.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

Page 143: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 143/204

Field Name Notes

FTP Setting This enables you to set the FTP server for downloading the

 NodeB software and cold patch software.

Click Modify on the right to set the FTP server.

Software Directory This specifies the path that stores the NodeB software package.

Click Browse and select a directory for the software package.

Supplying Patch Software If you have or know the specific path of the NodeB cold patch,

select this check box and specify the path in the Patch

Directory.

Patch Directory This specifies the path that stores the NodeB cold patch.

Click Browse and select a directory for the cold patch.

 

11.7.3 Interface Reference for Synchronizing Version

This section describes the interface reference for Synchronizing Version dialog box.

If... Then...

The synchronization status is

Synchronizing or Synchronized,

The operation is complete.

The synchronization status is Not

Synchronized,

Click Next.

 

11.7.4 Interface Reference for Activating Board Software

This section describes the interface reference for activating board software.

Field Description

Activate

Software

A type of 

 boards

Select this option to activate software for a type of boards at a

time.

Select the type of boards to be activated from the Board type

drop-down list.

Single

 board

Select this option to activate software for a single board at a

time.

Specify Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No..

 

11.7.5 Interface Reference for Upgrading NodeB Software

This section provides the interface reference for upgrading the NodeB software.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

Page 144: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 144/204

Field Description

FTP Setting This enables you to set the FTP server for downloading the NodeB

software.

The FTP server that is in use is shown in the box for your reference.The FTP server can be a built-in server or a user-specified server.

To set the FTP server, click Modify on the right side of the element.

BackUp Data

Configuration File

This enables you to upload the configuration file from the NodeB to

the FTP server.

To specify a path for the file upload, click Browse under Backup Data

Configuration File.

Select the path to back up the active data configuration file of the

 NodeB.

If you have already backed up the file, you can skip this step.

In case of upgrade failure, you can reload the backup configuration

file in the FTP server to guarantee stable operation of the NodeB.

Downloading the

Data Configuration

File

This enables you to download the data configuration file from the

server to the NodeB and overwrite the previous data configuration

file.

To specify a path for the downloading data configuration file, click 

Browse.

This operation is optional. The data configuration file has a fixed

name of NodeBCfg.xml. Therefore, you only need to specify the path

in which the file would be saved.

Download NodeB

Software Package

This enables you to download the NodeB software package from the

FTP server to the NodeB standby directory. Performing this operation

does not affect the NodeB operation.

Click Browse under Download NodeB Software Package. Select the

directory of the package in the FTP server.

The system will start the download after backing up the configuration

file.

This operation is mandatory for the NodeB software upgrade. The

 NodeB software package has a fixed name of NodeB.pck . Therefore,

you only need to specify the path in which the file would be saved.

Download by

Configuration

When downloading by configuration, only required board software

 packages are downloaded. This reduces the total volume of data to be

downloaded, shortens the download time, and saves storage space on

the NodeB.

This step is optional. By selecting Download by Configuration, you

can download the required board software of the boards in position

according to the current NodeB configuration. Otherwise, all the

 board software will be downloaded.

By default, the check box is selected.

Effective Data

Configuration File

By selecting Effective Data Configuration File, you can make the

downloaded data configuration file take effect.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

Page 145: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 145/204

Field Description

Activate NodeB

Software

This enables you to download the unpacked software package in the

 NodeB standby directory to each board, and then activate the package.

You must reset the NodeB after conducting this operation. If you

select Activate NodeB Software, the NodeB software will be

activated right after the NodeB software package is downloaded.

l If you select both Download NodeB Software Package and

Activate NodeB Software, the software to be activated is the

 NodeB software package downloaded from the FTP server. You

need not to select the version.

l If you select Activate NodeB Software without selecting

Download NodeB Software Package, the system will list all the

 NodeB software versions. Select the version to be activated in the

active and standby directories from the Version drop-down list.

 

11.7.6 Interface Reference for Status Description and ProgressIndicator

This section describes the interface reference for status description and progress indicator.

Field Description

Previous This button is enabled only after completing the task or the task is stopped

 by the user.

Click this button to return to previous interface for task settings.

Return to

Directory

This button is available only after the task to be completed in this page is

completed or the user stops the task.

Click this button to return to the software update window.

Cancel When the LMT is downloading a software package (NodeB software

 package or BootROM software package), click this button to stop the

downloading.

When the LMT is activating or backing up data configuration files, the

 button changes to Close. Clicking this button leads to exit from the software

upgrading, but the activating or the backing up continues.

View Detailed

Information

This operation is available only after the activation is successful.

Click this button to view detailed activation result. The displayed result

includes the boards that have activated successfully or failed to activate.

The boards in the failure board list must be activated again. You must check 

the causes to failure and activate these failed boards again.

 

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

Page 146: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 146/204

NOTE

l The task result of the software upgrade interface is depends on your settings. The running status and

 progress indicator are displayed only when you start a task.

l By clicking Cancel button while downloading, the system returns a failure code of 75. The

downloading task is eliminated and the button changes to Close. When you click this Close button,the dialog box is closed.

11.7.7 Interface Reference for Upgrading BootROM

This section describes the interface reference for upgrading BootROM.

Field Description

FTP Setting This enables you to set the FTP server for uploading and downloading

BootROM software package. The FTP server in use is shown in the box for 

your reference. It can be a built-in server or a user-specified server. Click 

Modify on the right to set the FTP server.

Download

BootROM

Package

This enables you to download the BootROM software package from the

FTP server to the temporary directory on the NodeB main processing board

and then to the related boards. It does not affect the running of the NodeB.

Click Browse to locate the directory of the BootROM software package in

the FTP server. Select this check box to download the BootROM software

 package. This operation is mandatory for the BootROM upgrade. Because

the BootROM software package has a fixed file name of NBRom.pck , you

only need to specify the path of it.

Activate

BootROM

This enables you to activate the BootROM software right after the

BootROM software package is downloaded. The BootROM software

version to be activated is the version of the BootROM software packagedownloaded to the boards.

 

11.7.8 Interface Reference for Upgrading Patch

This section describes the interface reference for upgrading patches.

Field Description

FTP Setting This enables you to set the FTP server for downloading the patch. The

FTP server in use is shown in the box for your reference. It can be a built-in server or a user-specified server. Click Modify on the right to set the

FTP server.

Patch Type This enables you to select one from the following patch types for the

upgrade: Software or BootROM.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

Page 147: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 147/204

Field Description

Download Patch

Software

Package

This enables you to download the patch package from the FTP server to

the NodeB standby file directory. This does not affect the running of the

 NodeB. To locate the path of the package in the FTP server, click 

Browse. Select this check box to download the patch package. This

operation is mandatory for the patch upgrade. The patch package has a

fixed file name, which is NBPatch.pck . Therefore, you only need to

specify its path.

Activate Patch This enables you to activate the patch right after the patch package is

downloaded.

 

11.7.9 Interface Reference for Upgrading NodeB Hot Patch

This section describes the interface reference for upgrading NodeB hot patch.

Field Description

FTP Setting This enables you to set the FTP server for downloading the hot patch.

The FTP server in use is shown in the box for your reference. It can be a

 built-in server or a user-specified server.

Click Modify on the right to set the FTP server.

Download Hot

Patch Software

Package

This enables you to download hot patch package from the FTP server to

the temporary hot patch file directory on the WMPT. Performing this

operation does not affect the NodeB operation.

To locate the path of the hot patch package in the FTP server, click 

Browse.

Select this check box to download the hot patch package. This operation

is mandatory for the hot patch upgrade.

Because the hot patch package has a fixed file name of NBHPatch.pck ,

you only need to specify the path of it.

Activate Hot

Patch

This enables you to activate the hot patch right after the patch package is

downloaded. After the activation, the patch works in trial running state.

Confirm HotPatch This enables you to confirm the hot patch software when the hot patchactivation is complete. After the confirmation, the hot patch software runs

 properly.

Deactivate Hot

Patch

Select this check box to deactivate the hot patch that is already effective.

Remove Hot

Patch

Select this option to remove the hot patch that already runs.

Back Patch Select this check box to roll back the current hot patch and recover the

status of the activated hot patch before the latest loading.

 

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

Page 148: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 148/204

11.7.10 Interface Reference for Upgrading Multi-Version Software

This section describes the interface reference for upgrading multi-version software.

Field Name NotesFTP Setting This enables you to set the FTP server for  

downloading NodeB software.

The FTP server that is in use is shown in the

 box for your reference. The FTP server can

 be a built-in server or a user-specified server.

Click Modify on the right to set the FTP

server.

Download Multi-Version Software This enables you to download the specified

multi-version software package to the

standby directory of the NodeB.

Software Version This parameter needs to be set when the

 NodeB software package is included in the

multi-version software package to be

downloaded.

Click Browse, and select the directory of the

 NodeB software package.

Cold Patch This parameter needs to be set when the cold

 patch software package is included in the

multi-version software package to be

downloaded.Click Browse, and select the directory of the

cold patch software package.

Hot Patch This parameter needs to be set when the hot

 patch software package is included in the

multi-version software package to be

downloaded.

Click Browse, and select the directory of the

hot patch software package.

Act Multi-Version software This enables you to activate the downloaded

multi-version software package at a time.This operation leads to the resetting of 

 NodeB.

 

NOTE

The multi-version software can be downloaded when the versions of Software Version, Cold Patch, and

Hot Patch software are matching with each other.

11.7.11 Interface Reference for Setting FTP Server

This section describes the interface reference for FTP Setting dialog box.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

Page 149: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 149/204

Field Description

Use Built-in FTP Server This enables you to decide whether to use a built-in or 

a specified FTP server. The built-in FTP server is

started by default.

Use Specified FTP

Server 

IP address The FTP server can be started either from the local

computer installed with the LMT application or from

another computer. Here it refers to the IP address of 

the FTP server.

User Name This enables you to specify the user name for logging

in to the FTP server.

Password This enables you to specify the password for logging

in to the FTP server.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 11 Managing the NodeB Software

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

Page 150: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 150/204

12 Managing NodeB Files

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to download and back up the NodeB data configuration file, and

how to upload NodeB log files and the device archive file.

12.1 Concepts of NodeB File Management

This section describes file types of the NodeB and where to obtain the files.

12.2 Managing the NodeB Data Configuration Files

This section describes how to download and back up the data configuration files of the

 NodeB.

12.3 Uploading NodeB Files to the FTP Server 

This section describes how to upload the NodeB files to the FTP server. After the NodeB files

are uploaded, you can save, browse, and modify the files.

12.4 Downloading the NodeB Extral Configuration File

This section describes how to download the NodeB extral configur ation file from the FTP server 

to the NodeB. The downloaded extral configuration files take effect after activating.

12.5 Interface Reference for Managing the NodeB File

This section describes the interface reference for managing the NodeB file.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 12 Managing NodeB Files

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

Page 151: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 151/204

12.1 Concepts of NodeB File Management

This section describes file types of the NodeB and where to obtain the files.

12.1.1 File Types of the NodeB

This section describes NodeB file types and operations supported by the types.

One-Click Log 

A one-click log consists of all types of log saved on a board, including the running log, cell log,

operation log, call log, and debugging log.

The one-click log is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

Security Log 

A security log records information about security-related events such as login and logout.

The security log is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

Running Log 

A running log records key events happening when the system is running, for example, board

starting.

The running log file is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

Operation Log 

An operation log records information about operations on and maintenance of NodeB.

The operation log is in txt format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

Configuration Failure Log 

A configuration log records configuration information about each parameter. A configuration

failure log records a failed upgrade.

The configuration failure log is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

Failure Log 

A fault log records key information about system failures such as system breakdown.

The failure log file is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

Configuration Log 

A configuration log records configuration information about each parameter running on the

system.

The configuration log is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 12 Managing NodeB Files

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

Page 152: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 152/204

Canbus Log 

A controller area network BUS (Canbus) log file records information about maintenance and

fault alarms of boards, which facilitates fault location and troubleshooting.

The Canbus log is in txt format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

Alarm Log 

An alarm log records detailed information about alarms reported by the system.

The alarm log file is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

Internal Fault Log 

An internal fault log records system fault information within the system.

The fault log file is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

Local Fault Log 

A local fault log records detailed information board faults at the board.

The fault log file is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

Test Result Log 

A test result log records results of tests performed by users.

The test result log is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

Transmission Quality Report Log 

A transmission quality report log records information about system transmission quality.

The transmission quality report log is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

Debugging Log 

A debugging log records all types of failure information and other key information during system

operation.

The debugging log is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

BSP Health Check Log 

A board support package (BSP) health check log records the result reports of health checks on

all types of hardware components that is performed by the BSP.

The BSP health check log is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

DSP Memory Log 

A digital signal processor (DSP) memory log records the mirror image of DSP memory when

the DSP in a board fails to work.

The DSP memory log is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 12 Managing NodeB Files

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

Page 153: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 153/204

DSP Log 

A DSP log records information when the DSP in a board is running.

The DSP log is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

RTWP Routine Test Log 

A Received Total Wideband Power (RTWP) routine test log records the corresponding RTWP

information after the routine test is started.

The RTWP routine test log is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

BSP Log 

A BSP log records all types of failure information and other key information during BSP

operation.

The BSP log is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

Serial Port Redirection Log 

A serial port redirection log records information about serial port output of a board after the

 board is disconnected from the main control board.

The serial port redirection log is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

Board Replacement Log 

A board replacement log records electronic labels of NodeB boards that were and are in use.

The Board Replacement Log is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

Temperature Log 

A temperature log records temperature of each board collected periodically.

A temperature log is in binary format and can be uploaded to the FTP server.

12.1.2 Obtaining NodeB Files

This section describes how to obtain NodeB files for browsing.

You can obtain and browse the files in either of the following ways:

l Browse the files by logging in to the FTP server after uploading the files to the server.

l Browse the operation log on the M2000.

12.2 Managing the NodeB Data Configuration Files

This section describes how to download and back up the data configuration files of the

 NodeB.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 12 Managing NodeB Files

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

Page 154: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 154/204

12.2.1 Downloading the NodeB Data Configuration File

This section describes how to download the NodeB data configuration file from the FTP server 

to the NodeB. The downloaded data configuration files take effect after the NodeB is reset.

Procedure

l GUI mode

1. In the navigation pane, click the Maintenance tab.

2. Double-click Software Management > Data Config File Transfer. The Data

Config File Transfer dialog box is displayed.

For the parameter details in the Data Config File Transfer dialog box, see 12.5.1

Interface Reference for Data Configure File Transfer.

3. Select the Download (FTP Server to NodeB).

4. Click Modify in the dialog box. The FTP Setting dialog box is displayed.

Table 12-1 describes the fields in the FTP Setting dialog box.

Table 12-1 Fields in the FTP Setting dialog box

Field Description

Use Built-in FTP Server Enables you to decide whether to use a built-in

or a specified FTP server. The built-in FTP

server is started by default.

Use Specified FTP

Server 

IP address The FTP server can be started either from the

local computer installed with the LMT

application or from another computer. Here it

refers to the IP address of the FTP server.

User 

 Name

Enables you to specify the user name for 

logging in to the FTP server.

Password Enables you to specify the password for 

logging in to the FTP server.

 

5. Set the FTP server.

6. Click OK . The FTP Setting dialog box is closed.

7. Set the other corresponding parameters in the Data Config File Transfer dialog box.

8. Click Start.

l MML mode

Run the command DLD CFGFILE.

----End

12.2.2 Backing up the NodeB Data Configuration File

This section describes how to back up the NodeB data configuration file. Backing up the

 NodeB data configuration file means uploading the data configuration file from the NodeB tothe FTP server, where you can browse the data anytime.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 12 Managing NodeB Files

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

Page 155: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 155/204

Procedure

l GUI mode

1. In the navigation pane, click the Maintenance tab.

2. Double-click Software Management > Data Config File Transfer. The DataConfig File Transfer dialog box is displayed.

For the parameter details in the Data Config File Transfer dialog box, see 12.5.1

Interface Reference for Data Configure File Transfer.

3. Select the Upload (NodeB to FTP server).

4. Click Modify in the dialog box. The FTP Setting dialog box is displayed.

Table 12-2 describes the fields in the FTP Setting dialog box.

Table 12-2 Fields in the FTP Setting dialog box

Field DescriptionUse Built-in FTP Server Enables you to decide whether to use a built-in

or a specified FTP server. The built-in FTP server 

is started by default.

Use Specified FTP

Server 

IP

address

The FTP server can be started either from the

local computer installed with the LMT

application or from another computer. Here it

refers to the IP address of the FTP server.

User 

 Name

Enables you to specify the user name for logging

in to the FTP server.

Passwor 

d

Enables you to specify the password for logging

in to the FTP server.

 

5. Set the FTP server.

6. Click OK . The FTP Setting dialog box is closed.

7. Set the other corresponding parameters in the Data Config File Transfer dialog box.

8. Click Start.

l MML mode

Run the command ULD CFGFILE.

----End

12.3 Uploading NodeB Files to the FTP Server

This section describes how to upload the NodeB files to the FTP server. After the NodeB files

are uploaded, you can save, browse, and modify the files.

12.3.1 Uploading the NodeB Log File to the FTP Server

This section describes how to upload a NodeB log file to the FTP server.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 12 Managing NodeB Files

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

Page 156: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 156/204

Prerequisite

l The FTP server works properly and is correctly connected to the NodeB in the same intranet.

l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the NodeB.

lThe user name and password for the specified FTP server are correct and ensure that youhave the permission to read the data in the specified directory.

Procedure

l GUI mode:

1. In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the

Maintenance tab.

2. Double-click Software Management > Other File Transfer. The Other File

Transfer dialog box is displayed.

For the parameter details in the Other File Transfer dialog box, see 12.5.3 Interface

Reference for Transferring Other Files.3. Select the log file type from the File Description drop-down list.

4. Click Modify. The FTP Setting dialog box is displayed.

Table 12-3 describes the fields in the FTP Setting dialog box.

Table 12-3 Fields in the FTP Setting dialog box

Field Description

Use Built-in FTP Server Enables you to decide whether to use a built-in or 

a specified FTP server. The built-in FTP server is

started by default.

Use Specified FTP

Server 

IP

address

The FTP server can be started either from the local

computer installed with the LMT application or 

from another computer. Here it refers to the IP

address of the FTP server.

User 

 Name

Enables you to specify the user name for logging

in to the FTP server.

Passwor 

d

Enables you to specify the password for logging

in to the FTP server.

 

5. Set the FTP server.

6. Click OK . The FTP Setting dialog box is closed and the Other File Transfer dialog

 box is displayed.

7. Set the other parameters in the dialog box.

8. Click Start.

NOTE

After the upload is complete, detailed information of the successful or failed uploading file is

available from the subsequent dialog box. For details, see 12.5.4 Interface Reference for

Detailed Information About Successful and Failed Files.

l MML mode

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 12 Managing NodeB Files

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

Page 157: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 157/204

Run the command ULD FILE.

----End

12.3.2 Uploading NodeB Device Archive FileThis section describes how to upload a NodeB device archive file to the FTP server.

Prerequisite

l The FTP server works properly and is correctly connected to the NodeB in the same intranet.

l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the NodeB.

l The user name and password for logging in to the specified FTP server are correct. Ensure

that you have the permission to read the data in the specified directory.

ContextThe default name of the NodeB device archive file is NodeBDevFile.xml.

Procedure

l GUI mode

1. In the navigation pane, click the Maintenance tab.

2. Double-click Software Management > Device Archives Transfer. The Device

Archives Transfer dialog box is displayed.

For the parameter details in the Device Archives Transfer dialog box, see 12.5.2

Interface Reference for Device Archives Transfer.

3. In the Transfer Type area, select both Export Device File and Upload Device File

and then click Start. The device archive file is generated and then uploaded.

NOTE

If you only want to upload the generated device archive file, select only Upload Device File.

4. Click Browse and specify the directory for saving the device archive file.

5. Click Modify. The FTP Setting dialog box is displayed.

Table 12-4 describes the fields in the FTP Setting dialog box.

Table 12-4 Fields in the FTP Setting dialog box

Field Description

Use Built-in FTP Server Enables you to decide whether to use a built-in

or a specified FTP server. The built-in FTP

server is started by default.

Use Specified FTP

Server 

IP

address

The FTP server can be started either from the

local computer installed with the LMT

application or from another computer. Here it

refers to the IP address of the FTP server.

User 

 Name

Enables you to specify the user name for 

logging in to the FTP server.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 12 Managing NodeB Files

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

Page 158: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 158/204

Field Description

Passwor 

d

Enables you to specify the password for logging

in to the FTP server.

 

6. Set the FTP server.

7. Click OK . The FTP Setting dialog box is closed, and the Device Archives

Transfer dialog box is displayed.

8. Click Start.

l MML mode

1. Run the command EXP DEVFILE to export archive file.

2. Run the command ULD DEVFILE to upload archive file.

----End

12.4 Downloading the NodeB Extral Configuration File

This section describes how to download the NodeB extral configuration file from the FTP server 

to the NodeB. The downloaded extral configuration files take effect after activating.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane, click the Maintenance tab.

Step 2 Double-click Software Management > DownLoad Extral XML configuration file. The

DownLoad Extral XML configuration file dialog box is displayed.

For the parameter details in the DownLoad Extral XML configuration file dialog box, see

12.5.5 Interface Reference for Downloading Extral XML configuration file.

Step 3 Set the corresponding parameters in the DownLoad Extral XML configuration file dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next. The DownLoad Extral XML configuration file dialog box is displayed.The status

and progress of the patch upgrade is displayed in the dialog box.Then,A dialog box is displayed

for your confirmation.

Step 5 On the displayed dialog box,click Yes.

----End

12.5 Interface Reference for Managing the NodeB File

This section describes the interface reference for managing the NodeB file.

12.5.1 Interface Reference for Data Configure File Transfer

This section describes the interface reference for transferring data configuration files.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 12 Managing NodeB Files

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

Page 159: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 159/204

Field Description

Parameter 

Setting

Transfer 

Type

By default, Upload(NodeB to

FTP Server) is selected,

indicating that the

NodeBCfg.xml is uploaded to

the FTP server.

In the Compress Flag area,

select an option to decide

whether to compress the data

configuration file or not. To

save space, select Compress.

l Uncompress: The uploaded

data configuration file is not

compressed.

l Compress: The uploaded

data configuration file is

compressed. Applying this

operation consumes more

CPU resource.

Select Download (FTP Serverto NodeB) to download the

configuration file of 

NodeBCfg.xml from the FTP

server to the NodeB.

In the Effective DataConfiguration File area, you

may choose to reset the NodeB

immediately or later. Resetting

the NodeB activates the data

configuration file.

l Reset Promptly: The

 NodeB is immediately reset

and the data configuration

file is validated.

l Reset Later: The NodeB is

manually reset later tovalidate the data

configuration file.

Directory

 Name

Enables you to specify the directory of the configuration file in the

FTP server. The configuration file has a fixed file name.

l If you select Upload (NodeB to FTP Server), it is the

destination path.

l If you select Download (FTP Server to NodeB), it is the

source path.

FTP

Setting

Enables you to set the FTP server for downloading the patch. The

FTP server in use is displayed for reference.

Click Modify on the right to set the FTP server.

Transfer 

status

Status Active status of the started task of the data configuration file

Progress Transfer progress of the data configuration file

 

12.5.2 Interface Reference for Device Archives Transfer

This section describes the interface reference for transferring archive files.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 12 Managing NodeB Files

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

Page 160: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 160/204

Field Description

Parameter 

Setting

Transfer Type   l If you select Export Device File, the system creates a

device archive file automatically. The name of the file

is NodeBDevFile.xml.

l If you select Upload Device File, the device archive

files are uploaded from the NodeB to the FTP server.

If both Export Device File and Upload Device File are

selected, the device archive files are created and uploaded.

Upload

Destination

File(*.xml)

Indicates a device archive file, which has an extension

of .xml. When you select Upload Device File in the

Transfer Type area, this option is available.

FTP Setting Enables you to specify the FTP server that stores data files

to be uploaded. The FTP server in use is displayed for 

reference.Click Modify on the right to set the FTP server.

Operation

status

Status Indicates the transfer status of the device archive file.

Progress Indicates the transfer progress of the device archive file.

 

12.5.3 Interface Reference for Transferring Other Files

This provides the interface reference for transferring other files.

Field Description

Parameter Setting Transfer Type By default, Upload(NodeB to FTP Server) is

selected. This indicates that the NodeB data files

are uploaded to the FTP server. This enables you

to save, browse, and modify the file.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 12 Managing NodeB Files

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

Page 161: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 161/204

Field Description

File Description This enables you to specify the type of the log file

to be uploaded. The types are listed as follows:

l BRDLOGl SECLOG

l RUNLOG

l OPRLOG

l BAKOTHER 

l EXPT

l CDM

l CANBUSLOG

l ALMLOG

l CFLTLOG

l LFLTLOG

l TSTRSLT

l TQRLOG

l DBGLOG

l BSPREPORT

l DSP Mem Log

l DSP Log

l RTWP Test Log

l BSP Log

l SOLLOG

l CBDLOG

l BDTLOG

Destination File or 

Directory

This enables you to specify the path or file in

which data files are saved on the FTP server.

FTP Setting This enables you to specify the FTP server that

stores data files to be uploaded or downloaded.

The FTP server that is in use is shown in the box

for your reference.To specify an FTP server, click Modify.

Upload Mode Indicates whether the compressed mode is used

for uploading files.

Transfer status Status Indicates the transfer status of the device archive

file.

Progress Indicates the transfer progress of the device

archive file.

 

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 12 Managing NodeB Files

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

Page 162: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 162/204

12.5.4 Interface Reference for Detailed Information AboutSuccessful and Failed Files

This section describes the interface reference for detailed information about successful and failed

files.

Field Description

Successful Files List File Name Name of files that are

successfully uploaded.

File Description Description of files that are

successfully uploaded.

Failed Files List File Name Name of files where uploading

has failed.

File Description Description of files where

uploading has failed.

Failure Cause Cause of uploading failure.

 

12.5.5 Interface Reference for Downloading Extral XMLconfiguration file

This section provides the interface reference for downloading extral XML configuration file.

Field Description

FTP Setting This enables you to set the FTP server for downloading the NodeB

software.

The FTP server that is in use is shown in the box for your reference.

The FTP server can be a built-in server or a user-specified server.

To set the FTP server, click Modify on the right side of the element.

DownLoad Config

File

This enables you to download the extral configuration file from the

FTP server to the NodeB.

To specify a path for the downloading extral configuration file, click Browse.

This operation is mandatory.

Pra_Activate Select this option to pre-activate the extral configuration file.

This operation is optional.

UpLoad The Result

File Of Pra_Activate

After pre-activation is completed in scenarios where the check box is

selected, the pre-activation result file is uploaded to the FTP server.

This operation is optional.

NOTE

The item can be performed only after Pra_Activate is selected.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 12 Managing NodeB Files

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

Page 163: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 163/204

Field Description

Activate Select this option to activate the extral configuration file.

This operation is mandatory.

UpLoad The Result

File Of Activate

After activation is completed in scenarios where the check box is

selected, the activation result file is uploaded to the FTP server.

This operation is optional.

NOTEThe item can be performed only after Activate is selected.

End BatchFile(Must

Select)

The extral configuration file is performed in the batch processing

 process. This task is used to end the batch processing process.

This operation is mandatory.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 12 Managing NodeB Files

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

Page 164: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 164/204

13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in

Real Time

About This Chapter

This chapter includes procedures for monitoring the NodeB performance and status in real-time

on the LMT.

13.1 Collecting the IP Clock Data

This section describes how to collect the IP clock data on the Iub interface to analyze the

fluctuation of  the IP packets report.Data related to frequency and phase discrimination is

included in the collected data.

13.2 Monitor ing the Traffic over the Transmission Ports

This section describes how to monitor the traffic over the transmission ports. By performing this

task, you can view the current overall bandwidth consumption of the ports in real time.

Monitoring ports consists of physical ports and transmission resource groups. The types of 

 physical port to be monitored are ETH, ETHTRK, PPP, MPGROUP, IMA, UNI, FRAATM,

IMALNK, and STM-1.

13.3 Monitoring the Traffic over the Transmission Links

This section describes how to monitor the traffic over the transmission links. By performing this

task, you can monitor the traffic of the data streams transmitted and received by the NodeB in

real time to review overall bandwidth consumption of various services. The types of transmission

link that can be monitored are PVC in ATM transmission and OM channel/SCTP/IPPATH inIP transmission.

13.4 Querying the Service Resources of a Cell

This section describes how to query the resources of a cell. By performing this task, you can

learn about the service status of the cell in real time. For example, you can review the number 

of UEs, number of UL CEs in use, and number of DL CEs in use.

13.5 Measuring the Cell-Level RTWP

The Received Total Wideband Power (RTWP) is the received wideband power in an uplink 

channel band measured at the UMTS Terrestrial Radio Network Access (UTRAN) access point.

This section describes how to measure the cell-level RTWP. You can calibrate the gain of uplink 

RF channels through the cell-level RTWP measurement. The NodeB RTWP test has impact onthe services.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

Page 165: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 165/204

13.6 Measuring the Board-Level RTWP

The Received Total Wideband Power (RTWP) is the received wideband power in an uplink 

channel band measured at the UMTS Terrestrial Radio Network Access (UTRAN) access point.

This section describes how to measure the board-level RTWP. You can calibrate the gain of 

uplink RF channels through the board-level RTWP measurement. The NodeB RTWP test has

impact on the services.

13.7 Testing the NodeB Clock 

This section describes how to test the clock of the NodeB. The quality of the clock source is

crucial to the system operation. Thus, you must handle the clock alarm once it is generated. The

clock test has no impact on the system or the service.

13.8 Scanning the Uplink Frequency

This section describes how to scan the uplink frequency. The uplink frequency scanning helps

you examine electromagnetic environment around the NodeB and internal interference of the

 NodeB. The RRU or WRFU scans the frequency continuously, calculates the strength of received

signals, and reports the results. It is recommended that the uplink frequency be scanned before

cell configuration.

13.9 Monitoring Output Power of the NodeB

This section describes how to monitor output power of the NodeB, including the typical output

 power and carrier output power.

13.10 Monitoring the Temperature of the NodeB

This section describes how to monitor the temperature of the NodeB. By performing this task,

you can monitor the temperature of both the MTRU and the internal power amplifier.

13.11 Querying the Resources of a NodeB Board

This section describes how to query the resources of a NodeB board. By querying the service

resources of a cell, you can learn about the service status of the board in real time, including the

total service r esources, occupied service resources, and idle service resources.

13.12 Monitoring the Cell Service Throughput

This section describes how to learn the distribution of the users in the cell by monitoring the

number of users in the cell UL and DL in real time.

13.13 Common Operations for Real-time Performance Monitoring on the NodeB

Common operations for real-time performance monitoring on the NodeB includes online/offline

 browsing of the monitoring result, saving the monitoring result, and ending the monitoring task.

13.14 Interface Reference for Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

This section describes the interface reference for the real-time specific monitoring of NodeB.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

Page 166: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 166/204

13.1 Collecting the IP Clock Data

This section describes how to collect the IP clock data on the Iub interface to analyze the

fluctuation of the IP packets report.Data related to frequency and phase discrimination is

included in the collected data.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Select Realtime Specific Monitoring > IP Clock Data Gather Monitoring. The IP Clock 

Data Gather dialog box is displayed.

For the parameter details in the IP Clock Data Gather dialog box, see 13.14.1 Interface

Reference for Collecting IP Clock Data.

Step 3 Set the corresponding parameters in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK . A window is displayed, showing the current monitoring task in graph.

Step 5 To stop this test task, use either of the following methods:

l Method 1: Close the task monitoring window directly to stop all monitoring tasks displayed

in the window.

l Method 2: Right-click the task on the monitoring task list and choose Delete Task  from the

shortcut menu. The curve displayed for the task is deleted together with the task.

----End

Result

Table 13-1 describes the monitoring items.

Table 13-1 Monitoring items for the IP clock data collecting

Item Description

Clock Data Max Indicates the maximum value of the clock data on the IP clock 

link.

Clock Data Min Indicates the minimum value of the clock data on the IP clock 

link.

 

13.2 Monitoring the Traffic over the Transmission Ports

This section describes how to monitor the traffic over the transmission ports. By performing this

task, you can view the current overall bandwidth consumption of the ports in real time.

Monitoring ports consists of physical ports and transmission resource groups. The types of 

 physical port to be monitored are ETH, ETHTRK, PPP, MPGROUP, IMA, UNI, FRAATM,IMALNK, and STM-1.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

Page 167: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 167/204

Prerequisite

You have logged in to the NodeB LMT.

Contextl The traffic monitoring of the monitored objects over four ports can be started on a board.

l Only one monitoring task can be started for one monitored object over the same port.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Select Realtime Specific Monitoring > IUB Port Flux Stat Monitoring. The IUB Port Flux

Stat Monitoring dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set the corresponding parameters. For details, see 13.14.2 Interface Reference for Traffic

Monitoring over the Transmission Ports.

Step 4 Click OK . A window is displayed, showing the current monitoring task in graph.

Step 5 To stop this monitoring task, use either of the following methods:

l Method 1: Close the task monitoring window to stop all monitoring tasks displayed in the

window.

l Method 2: Right-click the task on the monitoring task list and select Delete Task  from the

shortcut menu. The curve displayed for the task is deleted together with the task.

----End

Result

The monitoring item varies with the type of physical port to be monitored. Table 13-2 lists the

 physical port types and monitoring items.

Table 13-2 Physical port types and monitoring items

Port Type Physical Port Type Monitoring Item

PHYSICAL_PORT ETH/ETHTRK/PPP/

MPGRP

l RX Rate of IP port

l TX Rate of IP port

l RX Packet Discard Rate

of IP Level

l TX Packet Discard Rate

of IP Level

l RX Packet Discard Rate

of Link Level

l TX Packet Discard Rate

of Link Level

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

Page 168: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 168/204

Port Type Physical Port Type Monitoring Item

IMA/UNI/FRAATM/

IMALNK/STM-1

l RX Rate of ATM

l TX Rate of ATM

l RX HCS Error Rate of ATM Port

RSCGRP ETH/ETHTRK/PPP/

MPGRP

TX Rate of IP logical port

IMA/UNI/FRAATM/

IMALNK/STM-1

TX Rate

 

Table 13-3 describes the monitoring items.

Table 13-3 Monitoring items for traffic over the transmission ports

Monitoring Item Description

RX Rate of ATM Receive rate on the monitored port

Unit: cps or bps

TX Rate of ATM Transmit rate on the monitored port

Unit: cps or bps

RX HCS Error Rate of ATM Port Receive packet error rate on the monitored

 port

Unit: cps or bps

RX Rate of IP port Receive rate on the monitored port

Unit: pps or bps

TX Rate of IP port Transmit rate on the monitored port

Unit: pps or bps

RX Packet Discard Rate of IP Level Receive packet loss rate at the IP layer on the

monitored port

Unit: ‰

TX Packet Discard Rate of IP Level Transmit packet loss rate at the IP layer on the

monitored port

Unit: ‰

RX Packet Discard Rate of Link Level Receive packet loss rate at the link layer on

the monitored port

Unit: ‰

TX Packet Discard Rate of Link Level Transmit packet loss rate at the link layer on

the monitored port

Unit: ‰

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

Page 169: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 169/204

Monitoring Item Description

TX Rate of IP logical port Transmit rate on the monitored port

Unit: pps or bps

TX Rate Transmit rate on the monitored port

Unit: cps or bps

 

13.3 Monitoring the Traffic over the Transmission Links

This section describes how to monitor the traffic over the transmission links. By performing this

task, you can monitor the traffic of the data streams transmitted and received by the NodeB in

real time to review overall bandwidth consumption of various services. The types of transmission

link that can be monitored are PVC in ATM transmission and OM channel/SCTP/IPPATH inIP transmission.

Prerequisite

You have logged in to the NodeB LMT.

Context

l Four simultaneous monitoring tasks over the transmission links can be started on a board.

l Only one monitoring task can be started for one monitored object over the same link.

l A maximum of six PVC links can be monitored in the same monitoring task for the ATM- based links.

l A maximum of six PVC data streams, involving one OM channel, two SCTP links, and

three IP paths, can be monitored in the same monitoring task for the IP-based links.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Select Realtime Specific Monitoring > IUB Link Flux Stat Monitoring. The IUB Link Flux

Stat Monitoring dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set the corresponding parameters. For details, see 13.14.3 Interface Reference for Traffic

Monitoring over the Transmission Links.

Step 4 Click OK . A window is displayed, showing the current monitoring task in graph.

Step 5 To stop this monitoring task, use either of the following methods:

l Method 1: Close the task monitoring window to stop all monitoring tasks displayed in the

window.

l Method 2: Right-click the task on the monitoring task list and select Delete Task  from the

shortcut menu. The curve displayed for the task is deleted together with the task.

----End

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

Page 170: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 170/204

Result

The monitoring item varies with the type of transmission link to be monitored. Table 13-4 lists

link types and monitoring items.

Table 13-4 Link types and monitoring items

Link Type Monitoring Item

PVC   l RX Rate of PVI x

l TX Rate of PVI x

NOTEThe value of x ranges from 1 to 6.

OM(TCP)   l RX Rate of TCP

l TX Rate of TCP

SCTP   l RX Rate of SCTP y

l TX Rate of SCTP y

l Receive Error Packets of SCTP y

l Retransmit Ratio of SCTP y

NOTEThe value of y ranges from 1 to 2.

IPPATH   l RX Rate of IPPATH z 

l TX Rate of IPPATH z 

If Include IPPM Statisticis is selected, the

following item is exported in the monitoringresult.

l Average RTT Delay of IPPATH z 

l TX Packet Discard Rate of IPPATH z 

l TX Time Jitter of IPPATH z 

NOTE

l The value of z  ranges from 1 to 3.

l If Include IPPM Statisticisis selected, the

IPPM must be actived, otherwise the operation

will fault.

 

Table 13-5 describes the monitoring items.

Table 13-5 Monitoring items for traffic over the transmission links

Monitoring Item Description

RX Rate of PVI x Receive rate at the PVI link 

Unit: cps or bps

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

Page 171: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 171/204

Monitoring Item Description

TX Rate of PVI x Transmit rate at the PVI link 

Unit: cps or bps

RX Rate of TCP Receive rate at the TCP link  

Unit: pps or bps

TX Rate of TCP Transmit rate at the TCP link  

Unit: pps or bps

RX Rate of SCTP y Receive rate at the SCTP link 

Unit: pps or bps

TX Rate of SCTP y Transmit rate at the SCTP link 

Unit: pps or bps

Receive Error Packets of SCTP y  Number of received error packets at the SCTP

link 

Unit: pps

Retransmit Ratio of SCTP y Retransmission rate of packets at the SCTP

link 

Unit: ‰

RX Rate of IPPATH z  Receive rate at the IPPATH link 

Unit: pps or bps

TX Rate of IPPATH z  Transmit rate at the IPPATH link 

Unit: pps or bps

Average RTT Delay of IPPATH z  Average delay of uplink and downlink 

Unit: ms

TX Packet Discard Rate of IPPATH z  Average transmit packet loss rate on the

uplink 

Unit: ‰

TX Time Jitter of IPPATH z  Average jitter of transmitted packets on the

uplink 

Unit: ms

 

13.4 Querying the Service Resources of a Cell

This section describes how to query the resources of a cell. By performing this task, you can

learn about the service status of the cell in real time. For example, you can review the number 

of UEs, number of UL CEs in use, and number of DL CEs in use.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

Page 172: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 172/204

Prerequisite

A logical cell is already set up.

Contextl UL resources refer to UL demodulation resources and UL decoding resources, measured

in points.

l DL resources refer to DL modulation resources and DL coding resources, measured in

 points.

NOTE

The resources consumed by a single instance of the 12.2 kbit/s voice service are defined as one point. For 

the other services, the consumed resources can be converted into points based on this criterion.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree, click the Maintenance tab.

Step 2 Select Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell Service Resource Query. The Cell Service

Resource Query dialog box is displayed.

For the parameter details in the Cell Service Resource Query dialog box, see 13.14.4 Interface

Reference for Querying Cell Service Resources.

Step 3 Set the corresponding parameters in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK . A window is displayed, showing the current monitoring task in graph.

Step 5 To stop this test task, use either of the following methods:l Method 1: Close the task monitoring window directly to stop all monitoring tasks displayed

in the window.

l Method 2: Right-click the task on the monitoring task list and select Delete Task  from the

shortcut menu. The curve displayed for the task is deleted together with the task.

----End

Result

Table 13-6 describes the monitoring items.

Table 13-6 Monitoring items for the cell service resources query

Item Description

User Number Indicates the number of UEs carried by the cell, including R99

and HSPA users.

Used UL CE Number Indicates the UL CEs consumed by all UEs in the

corresponding cell.

Used DL CE Number Indicates the DL CEs consumed by all UEs in the

corresponding cell.

 

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

Page 173: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 173/204

13.5 Measuring the Cell-Level RTWP

The Received Total Wideband Power (RTWP) is the received wideband power in an uplink 

channel band measured at the UMTS Terrestrial Radio Network Access (UTRAN) access point.

This section describes how to measure the cell-level RTWP. You can calibrate the gain of uplink 

RF channels through the cell-level RTWP measurement. The NodeB RTWP test has impact on

the services.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane, click the Maintenance tab.

Step 2 Double-click Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell RTWP. The Cell RTWP dialog box is

displayed.

For the parameter details in the Cell RTWP dialog box, see 13.14.5 Interface Reference for

Measuring the Cell RTWP.

Step 3 Set the corresponding parameters in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK . A monitoring window is displayed, showing the current monitoring task in graphs.

Step 5 To stop this test task, use either of the following methods:

l Method 1: Close the task monitoring window directly to stop all monitoring tasks displayed

in the window.

l Method 2: Right-click the task on the monitoring task list and select Delete Task  from the

shortcut menu. The curve displayed for the task is deleted together with the task.

----End

Result

Table 13-7 describes the monitoring items.

Table 13-7 Monitoring items for the cell-level RTWP measurement

Item Description

Local Cell ID ID of the cell under the NodeB.

Cell ID ID of the cell under the RNC.

Runtime Cell RTWP

(0.1dBm)

Cell-level real-time received total wideband power (RTWP).

 

NOTE

l One RF module can be configured with one to four carriers. The system outputs the RTWP value of 

the corresponding carrier based on the actual configuration.

l One carrier may be configured with main and diversity RX.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

Page 174: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 174/204

13.6 Measuring the Board-Level RTWP

The Received Total Wideband Power (RTWP) is the received wideband power in an uplink 

channel band measured at the UMTS Terrestrial Radio Network Access (UTRAN) access point.

This section describes how to measure the board-level RTWP. You can calibrate the gain of 

uplink RF channels through the board-level RTWP measurement. The NodeB RTWP test has

impact on the services.

Context

Analyses of the board-level RTWP measurement are as follows:

l If the NodeB is disconnected from the antenna system or a matched load, the RTWP is

approximately -108 dBm. If the NodeB is connected to the antenna system (with TMA

switched on) or a matched load, the RTWP is approximately -105 dBm.

l If the services are normal and the uplink load reaches 75%, the RTWP is 6 dB higher than

the RTWP when the NodeB does not carry any service.

NOTE

l When the reported RTWP is valid, the curve is normal. The vertical axis corresponds to the reported

RTWP with the unit of 0.1 dBm.

l When the reported RTWP is invalid, abnormal RTWP curves are displayed. The RTWP for the main

antenna forms a horizontal line at -112 dBm on the vertical axis. The RTWP for the diversity antenna

forms a horizontal line at -111.5 dBm on the vertical axis. The error may lie in the absent MTRU or 

RRU, a broken link, or a faulty channel. In this case, clear the fault first.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane, click the Maintenance tab.

Step 2 Double-click Realtime Specific Monitoring > Board RTWP. The Board RTWP dialog box

is displayed.

For the parameter details in the Board RTWP dialog box, see 13.14.6 Interface Reference for

Measuring the Board RTWP.

Step 3 Set the corresponding parameters in the dialog box.

Step 4Click OK . A monitoring window is displayed, showing the current monitoring task in graphs.

Step 5 To stop this test task, use either of the following methods:

l Method 1: Close the task monitoring window directly to stop all monitoring tasks displayed

in the window.

l Method 2: Right-click the task on the monitoring task list and select Delete Task  from the

shortcut menu. The curve displayed for the task is deleted together with the task.

----End

Result

Table 13-8 describes the monitoring items.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

Page 175: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 175/204

Table 13-8 Monitoring items for the board-level RTWP measurement

Item Description

Carrier n Rx Receive Freq Indicates the center frequency in the UL of carrier n. Unit: 0.2

MHz

Carrier n Primary RTWP

(0.1dBm)

Indicates the RTWP value for the main antenna in the UL of 

carrier n.

Carrier n Secondary RTWP

(0.1dBm)

Indicates the RTWP value for the diversity antenna in the UL

of carrier n.

 

NOTE

l The value of n ranges from 0 to 5 (One RF module can be configured with one to six carriers). The

system outputs the RTWP value of the corresponding carrier based on the actual configuration.

l One carrier may be configured with main and diversity RX.

13.7 Testing the NodeB Clock

This section describes how to test the clock of the NodeB. The quality of the clock source is

crucial to the system operation. Thus, you must handle the clock alarm once it is generated. The

clock test has no impact on the system or the service.

Prerequisite

The reference clock source for the NodeB is configured.

Context

The reference standards for the clock test are as follows:

l For the GPS and BITS clock sources, the reporting period of the DA value is two minutes

in normal conditions. In the case of jitter or large frequency offset, the reporting period

may be longer than 2 minutes. Note that it is normal that the first reporting period is not 2

minutes.

l For the LINE clock source, the reporting period of the DA value is 30 minutes in normal

conditions. In the case of jitter or large frequency offset, the reporting period may be longer 

than 30 minutes. Note that it is normal that the first reporting period is not 30 minutes.

NOTE

l The reporting period of the phase discrimination value is different from that of the DA value. The

reporting period of the phase discrimination value is 1s, while the reporting period of the DA value

varies according to the type of the clock sources.

l In general, the phase discrimination value is from -10 to +10 when the clock module is functional.

When the clock module malfunctions and a large frequency offset exists, the phase discrimination

value is from -128 to +127.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

Page 176: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 176/204

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Select Realtime Specific Monitoring > Clock Test. The Clock Test dialog box is displayed.

For the parameter details in the Clock Test dialog box, see 13.14.7 Interface Reference for

Testing the Clock .

Step 3 Set the corresponding parameters in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK . A window is displayed, showing the current monitoring task in graph.

Step 5 To stop this test task, use either of the following methods:

l Method 1: Close the task monitoring window directly to stop all monitoring tasks displayed

in the window.

l Method 2: Right-click the task on the monitoring task list and select Delete Task  from the

shortcut menu. The curve displayed for the task is deleted together with the task.

----End

Result

Table 13-9 describes the monitoring items.

Table 13-9 Monitoring items for the NodeB clock test

Item Description

Phase Discrimination Indicates the monitored phase offset of the current clock.

 

13.8 Scanning the Uplink Frequency

This section describes how to scan the uplink frequency. The uplink frequency scanning helps

you examine electromagnetic environment around the NodeB and internal interference of the

 NodeB. The RRU or WRFU scans the frequency continuously, calculates the strength of received

signals, and reports the results. It is recommended that the uplink frequency be scanned beforecell configuration.

Prerequisite

The MTRU/MRRU must be blocked before the RX frequency scanning starts.

Context

Reference criteria for test results of the uplink frequency scanning are as follows:

l

If the NodeB is disconnected from the antenna system and the curve jumps higher than-108 dBm, there is internal interference from the NodeB.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

Page 177: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 177/204

l If the NodeB is connected to the antenna system with the TMA powered on and the

attenuation values of RF channels are configured to compensate the TMA gain and feeder 

loss and if the curve jumps higher than -105 dBm, there must be external interference.

l The shapes of the jumps tell the interference type in normal cases.

–A triangular or trapezium jump: There is tone interference. The peak of the jump is thecentral frequency of the interference.

– A rectangle jump or a jump added with a rectangle: There is individual broadband

interference. The central point of the upper side of the rectangle is the interference

frequency.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Double-click Realtime Specific Monitoring > RX Frequency Scanning. The RX Frequency

Scanning dialog box is displayed.

For the parameter details in the RX Frequency Scanning dialog box, see 13.14.8 Interface

Reference for Scanning the UL Frequency.

Step 3 Set the corresponding parameters in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK . A dialog box prompts you to start the uplink frequency scanning.

Step 5 Click Yes. A new window is displayed, showing the monitoring chart of the current task.

Step 6 Stop the test in one of the following ways.

l Method 1: Close the task monitoring window directly to stop all monitoring tasks displayed

in the window.l Method 2: Right-click the task on the monitoring task list and select Delete Task  from the

shortcut menu. The curve displayed for the task is deleted together with the task.

----End

Result

Table 13-10 describes the monitoring items.

Table 13-10 Monitoring items for the RX frequency scanning

Item Description

Current Frequency Indicates the frequency that is currently being scanned.

Primary RTWP(0.1dBm) Indicates the RTWP value for the main antenna.

Secondary RTWP(0.1dBm) Indicates the RTWP value for the diversity antenna.

 

13.9 Monitoring Output Power of the NodeB

This section describes how to monitor output power of the NodeB, including the typical output power and carrier output power.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

Page 178: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 178/204

Context

After the task has started, the system periodically reports the monitored typical power and the

output power of each carrier according to the set time interval.Configuration of the NodeB output power depends on the specified services.

The output power of the NodeB is associated with the configuration and specified services. If 

the pilot power and typical output power are configured, the output power of the WRFU or RRU

is about 3 dB greater than the pilot power when the NodeB carries no services. If the output

 power of the WRFU or RRU is considerably lower than the pilot power, the output power of the

 NodeB is abnormal.

The pilot power of the WRFU or RRU can be set to 33 dBm. The typical power can be set to 43

dBm.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane, click the Maintenance tab.

Step 2 Double-clickRealtime Specific Monitoring > Output Power Monitoring. The Output Power

Monitoring dialog box is displayed.

For the parameter details in the Output Power Monitoring dialog box, see 13.14.9 Interface

Reference for Monitoring the Output Power.

Step 3 Set the corresponding parameters in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK . A monitoring window is displayed, showing the current monitoring task in graphs.

Step 5 To stop this test task, use either of the following methods:

l Method 1: Close the task monitoring window directly to stop all monitoring tasks displayed

in the window.

l Method 2: Right-click the task on the monitoring task list and select Delete Task  from the

shortcut menu. The curve displayed for the task is deleted together with the task.

----End

Result

Table 13-11 describes the monitoring items.

Table 13-11 Monitoring items for the NodeB output power measurement

Item Description

Carrier Output Power 

(Channel No: X; Carrier No:

Y; Unit: 0.1dBm)

Indicates the output power of Y carrier in X channel. The

carrier output power is the actual output power of the RRU.

Channel Output Power 

(Channel No: X; Unit:

0.1dBm)

Indicates the typical output power in X channel corresponding

to the RF module. The channel output power is the ideal output

 power, which is the theoretical output power.

 

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

Page 179: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 179/204

13.10 Monitoring the Temperature of the NodeB

This section describes how to monitor the temperature of the NodeB. By performing this task,you can monitor the temperature of both the MTRU and the internal power amplifier.

Context

After the task has started, the system periodically reports the temperature of the WMPT, UTRP,

WRFU, RRU, and internal power amplifier, according to the set time interval. This alarm is

raised when the working temperature of the power module is beyond the limit.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenancetab.

Step 2 Double-click Realtime Specific Monitoring > Temperature Monitoring. The Temperature

Monitoring dialog box is displayed.

For the parameter details in the Temperature Monitoring dialog box, see 13.14.10 Interface

Reference for Monitoring the Temperature.

Step 3 Set the corresponding parameters in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK . A monitoring window is displayed, showing the current monitoring task in graphs.

Step 5 Stop the test in one of the following ways.

l Method 1: Close the task monitoring window directly to stop all monitoring tasks displayed

in the window.

l Method 2: Right-click the task on the monitoring task list and select Delete Task  from the

shortcut menu. The curve displayed for the task is deleted together with the task.

----End

Result

Table 13-12 describes the monitoring items.

Table 13-12 Monitoring items for the NodeB temperature measurement

Item Description

Board Temperature

(Celsius)

Indicates the temperature of the monitored unit.

PA Temperature(Celsius) Indicates the temperature of the internal PA of the monitored

unit.

 

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

Page 180: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 180/204

13.11 Querying the Resources of a NodeB Board

This section describes how to query the resources of a NodeB board. By querying the service

resources of a cell, you can learn about the service status of the board in real time, including the

total service resources, occupied service resources, and idle service resources.

Prerequisite

LMT has logged into the NodeB.

The board to be queried is not blocked.

Context

The occupancy of the board service resource is presented in percentage by dividing the occupied

number by the total number. The resource occupancy consists of the following parts:

l Resource occupancy for demodulating the DSP

l Resource occupancy for decoding the DSP

l Resource occupancy for encoding the DSP

NOTE

l This query is only for the available DSPs. Those unavailable DSPs are not displayed.

l The resources for a 12.2 kbit/s voice service channel are regarded as a point. Other service channel

resources can be converted into points based on this criterion.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Select Realtime Specific Monitoring > Board Service Resource Query. The Board Service

Resource Query dialog box is displayed.

For the parameter details in the Board Service Resource Query dialog box, see 13.14.11

Interface Reference for Querying the Resources of a Board.

Step 3 Set the corresponding parameters in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK . A window is displayed, showing the current monitoring task in graph.

Step 5 To stop this test task, use either of the following methods:

l Method 1: Close the task monitoring window directly to stop all monitoring tasks displayed

in the window.

l Method 2: Right-click the task on the monitoring task list and select Delete Task  from the

shortcut menu. The curve displayed for the task is deleted together with the task.

----End

Result

Table 13-13 describes the monitoring items.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

Page 181: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 181/204

Table 13-13 Monitoring items for NodeB board service resources query

Item Description

Encoding DSPX Indicates resources used to encode the DSP of the

corresponding service board.

Demodulating DSPX Indicates resources used to demodulate the DSP of the

corresponding service board.

Decoding DSPX Indicates resources used to decode the DSP of the

corresponding specific service board.

 

NOTE

X represents the number of the corresponding service board, which can use the serial number of the currently

available DSPs.

13.12 Monitoring the Cell Service Throughput

This section describes how to learn the distribution of the users in the cell by monitoring the

number of users in the cell UL and DL in real time.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation tree of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Select Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell Through Out Statistic. The Cell Through Out

Statistic dialog box is displayed.

For the parameter details in the Cell Through Out Statistic dialog box, see 13.14.12 Interface

Reference for the Cell Traffic Throughput Statistics.

Step 3 Set the corresponding parameters in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK . A window is displayed, showing the current monitoring task in graph.

Step 5 To stop this test task, use either of the following methods:

l Method 1: Close the task monitoring window directly to stop all monitoring tasks displayed

in the window.

l Method 2: Right-click the task on the monitoring task list and select Delete Task  from the

shortcut menu. The curve displayed for the task is deleted together with the task.

----End

Result

Table 13-14 describes the monitoring items.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

Page 182: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 182/204

Table 13-14 Monitoring items for the cell service throughput measurement

Item Description

Ul R99 Throughput(bps) Indicates the UL throughput of the R99 services in the specific

cell.

Ul Hspa Throughput(bps) Indicates the UL throughput of the HSPA services in the

specific cell.

Dl R99 Throughput(bps) Indicates the DL throughput of the R99 services in the specific

cell.

 

13.13 Common Operations for Real-time Performance

Monitoring on the NodeBCommon operations for real-time performance monitoring on the NodeB includes online/offline

 browsing of the monitoring result, saving the monitoring result, and ending the monitoring task.

13.13.1 Browsing Monitoring Results of NodeB Online

This section describes how to browse or query the monitoring results displayed in the

 performance monitoring window in real time.

Prerequisite

l The real-time performance monitoring task has started.

l Monitoring results are reported by the system.

Procedure

l Right-click on the List tab page in the real-time performance monitoring window. You can

 perform the following operation through the shortcut menu:

– Sets auto scroll

l Right-click on the Chart tab page in the real-time performance monitoring window. You

can perform the following operations through the shortcut menu:

– Sets auto scroll

– Shows or hiding grid

– Sets Y axis display range

– Switches the display mode

l Right-click in the task information pane at the bottom of the real-time performance

monitoring window. You can perform the following operation through the shortcut menu:

– Adds/Deletes tasks

----End

13.13.2 Saving Monitoring Results of the NodeB

This section describes how to save the monitoring results of NodeB in files for later query.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

Page 183: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 183/204

Prerequisite

l The real-time performance monitoring task has started.

l Monitoring results are reported by the system.

Context

l The default save path is LMT installation directory\adaptor\clientadaptor\NodeB\LMT

software version number\output\realmonitor.

l The default file name is Monitoring 

 Item_Year_Month_Day_Hour_Minute_Second_Corresponding Parameter 

l The extension name of the file automatically saved is .txt.

ProcedureStep 1 When creating a monitoring task, select the Auto Save check box in the dialog box for setting

 parameters. By default, the check box is selected.

Step 2 Click OK  to save the monitoring results in the specified path.

----End

13.13.3 Stopping a Monitoring Task of the NodeB

This section describes how to stop a monitoring task that occupies resources when the monitoring

task is no longer needed.

Prerequisite

A tracing task has been successfully created.

Procedure

l Click in the right upper corner of the monitoring window to stop monitoring.

l Right-click the task in the task list below the graph area and then choose Delete Task  from

the shortcut menu.

----End

13.13.4 Browsing Monitoring Results of the NodeB Offline

This section describes how to browse NodeB monitoring results offline on the LMT. It helps in

reviewing the operation history and locating the faults.

Prerequisite

The monitoring results are saved in files.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

Page 184: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 184/204

Page 185: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 185/204

Parameter Description

Sub Board Type If Protocol Type is set to ATM, this parameter can be set

to:

l E1_COVERBOARD or UNCHANNELED_COV-ERBOARD when Slot No. is from 0 to 52.

l BASE_BOARD or BACK_BOARD when Slot No. is

6 or 7.

l BASE_BOARD or BACK_BOARD when Slot No. is

3.

If Protocol Type is set to IP, this parameter can be set to:

l E1_COVERBOARD or ETH_COVERBOARD

when Slot No. is from 0 to 52.

l BASE_BOARD or BACK_BOARD when Slot No. is

6 or 7.l BASE_BOARD or BACK_BOARD when Slot No. is

3.

Port Type This parameter can be set to PHYSICAL_PORT or 

RSCGRP.

Physical Port

Type

If Protocol is set to ATM, this parameter can be set to:

l IMA, UNI, FRAATM, or IMALNK  when Sub Board

Type is BASE_BOARD

l UNI, FRAATM, or IMALNK  when Sub Board

Type is BACK_BOARD

l IMA, UNI, FRAATM, or IMALNK  when Sub Board

Type is E1_COVERBOARD

l STM-1 when Sub Board Type is

UNCHANNELED_COVERBOARD

If Protocol is set to IP, this parameter can be set to:

l PPP, MPGRP, or ETH when Sub Board Type is

BASE_BOARD

l PPP when Sub Board Type is BACK_BOARD

l ETH or ETHTRK  when Sub Board Type is

ETH_COVERBOARD

l PPP or MPGRP when Sub Board Type is

E1_COVERBOARD

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

Page 186: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 186/204

Parameter Description

Port No. In the case that Protocol is set to ATM,

l If Sub Board Type is set to BASE_BOARD, this

 parameter can be set to:– 0 or 1 when Port Type is IMA

– 0 to 3 when Port Type is UNI

– 0 to 3 when Port Type is FRAATM

– 0 to 3 when Port Type is IMALNK 

l If Sub Board Type is set to BACK_BOARD, this

 parameter can be set to:

– 0 to 3 when Port Type is UNI

– 0 to 3 when Port Type is FRAATM

0 to 3 when Port Type is IMALNK l If Sub Board Type is set to E1_COVERBOARD, this

 parameter can be set to:

– 0 to 3 when Port Type is IMA

– 0 to 7 when Port Type is UNI

– 0 to 7 when Port Type is FRAATM

– 0 to 7 when Port Type is IMALNK 

l If Sub Board Type is set to UNCHANNELED_COV-

ERBOARD, this parameter can be set to:

– 0 when Port Type is STM-1

In the case that Protocol is set to IP,

l If Sub Board Type is set to BASE_BOARD, this

 parameter can be set to:

– 0 to 11 when Port Type is PPP

– 0 or 1 when Port Type is MPGRP

– 0 or 1 when Port Type is ETH

l If Sub Board Type is set to BACK_BOARD, this

 parameter can be set to:

– 0 to 11 when Port Type is PPP

l If Sub Board Type is set to E1_COVERBOARD, this parameter can be set to:

– 0 to 11 when Port Type is PPP

– 0 to 3 when Port Type is MPGRP

l If Sub Board Type is set to ETH_COVERBOARD,

this parameter can be set to:

– 0 to 3 when Port Type is ETH

– 0 or 1 when Port Type is ETHTRK 

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

Page 187: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 187/204

Parameter Description

Unit This parameter can be set to cps or bps when Protocol

Type is set to ATM.

This parameter can be set to pps or bps when ProtocolType is set to IP.

Reporting

Period(s)

This parameter indicates the periods for reporting the

monitoring tasks, with a fixed value of 1.

Include IP

Discard Packet's

Information

This parameter is valid only when Protocol Type is set to

IP.

When this parameter is selected, the RX and the TX Packet

Discard Rate on the IP layer is exported in the monitoring

result. The unit of Packet Discard Rate is ‰.

Include Link 

Discard Packet's

Information

This parameter is valid only when Protocol Type is set to

IP.

When this parameter is selected, the RX and the TX Packet

Discard Rate on the link layer is exported in the monitoring

result. The unit of Packet Discard Rate is ‰.

Choose Resource Group This parameter is valid only when Port Type is set to

RSCGRP.

The resource groups are invariably classified into four 

groups: Resource Group 0, Resource Group 1, Resource

Group 2, and Resource Group 3. You can select a proper 

group based on the resource group number allocated to you.

Auto Save If this check box is selected, the monitoring data file is

automatically saved.

Text File Name This parameter indicates the name of a .txt file to save the

measurement data.

 

13.14.3 Interface Reference for Traffic Monitoring over theTransmission Links

This section describes the interface reference for traffic monitoring over the transmission links.

Parameter Description

Parameter 

Setting

Protocol Type This parameter can be set to IP or ATM.

Cabinet No. The fixed value of this parameter is 0~7.

Subrack No. This parameter indicates the subrack number of the BBU,

with a fixed value of 0~1.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

Page 188: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 188/204

Parameter Description

Slot No. This parameter indicates the slot number of the WMPT or 

UTRP.

The value range is from 0 to 73.

Sub Board Type If Protocol Type is set to ATM. This parameter can be set

to:

E1_COVERBOARD or UNCHANNELLED_COVER-

BOARD when Slot No. is from 0 to 52

BASE_BOARD or BACK_BOARD when Slot No. is 6

or 7.

BASE_BOARDor BACK_BOARD when Slot No. is 3.

Physical Port

Type

If Protocol Type is set to ATM. This parameter can be set

to:

IMA, UNI, or FRAATM when Sub Board Type is

BASE_BOARD

UNI, or FRAATM when Sub Board Type is

BACK_BOARD

IMA, UNI, or FRAATM when Sub Board Type is

E1_COVERBOARD

UNCHANNELLED_COVERBOARD when Sub

Board Type is STM-1

Port No. This parameter is valid only when Protocol Type is set to

ATM.

l If Sub Board Type is set to BASE_BOARD, this

 parameter can be set to:

– 0 or 1 when Port Type is IMA

– 0 to 3 when Port Type is UNI

– 0 to 3 when Port Type is FRAATM

l If Sub Board Type is set to BACK_BOARD, this

 parameter can be set to:

– 0 to 3 when Port Type is UNI

– 0 to 3 when Port Type is FRAATM

l If Sub Board Type is set to E1_COVERBOARD, this

 parameter can be set to:

– 0 to 3 when Port Type is IMA

– 0 to 7 when Port Type is IMALNK 

– 0 to 7 when Port Type is UNI

l If Sub Board Type is set to UNCHANNELED_COV-

ERBOARD, this parameter can be set to:

– 0 when Port Type is STM-1

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

Page 189: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 189/204

Parameter Description

Unit This parameter can be set to cps, or bps, or when Protocol

Type is set to ATM.

This parameter can be set to pps or bps when ProtocolType is set to IP.

Report Period(s) This parameter indicates the periods for reporting the

monitoring tasks, with a fixed value of 1.

Include IPPM

Statistic

This parameter is valid only when Protocol Type is set to

IP.

If this parameter is selected, the IPPM is detected and

reported.

ATM Parameter This parameter is valid only when Protocol Type is set to

ATM.

A maximum of six PVC links can be monitored

simultaneously. You can select the corresponding PVC

indexes and set VPI and VCI attributes according to the

PVC links to be monitored.

IP

Parameter 

TCP The IP link traffic monitoring function enables monitoring

of a maximum of one OM channel, two SCTP links, and

three IP paths at the same time.

If this parameter is selected, the specified OM channel can

 be monitored. In this case, you must set Local IP, Remote

IP, and the priority of DSCP.

SCTP1/SCTP2 If an SCTP index is selected and number of the SCTP link 

is specified, the traffic monitoring task over the SCTP link 

is started.

IPPATH1/

IPPATH2/

IPPATH3

If an IP path index is selected and ID of the IP path is

specified, the traffic monitoring task over the IP path is

started.

Auto Save If this check box is selected, the monitoring data file is

automatically saved.

Text File Name This parameter indicates the name of a .txt file to save the

measurement data.

 

13.14.4 Interface Reference for Querying Cell Service Resources

This section describes the interface reference for querying the cell service resources.

Field Description

Local Cell ID This is the target Cell ID.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

Page 190: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 190/204

Field Description

Text File Name This parameter indicates the name of a .txt file to save the measurement

data.

 

13.14.5 Interface Reference for Measuring the Cell RTWP

This section provides the interface reference for measuring the Cell RTWP.

Field Description

Cell ID ID of the cell to be measured.

Reporting Period(s) Reporting period of measurement reports. Value: 1s.

Auto Save If this check box is selected, the testing data file is automatically

saved.

Text File Name Name of a .txt file to save the measurement data.

 

13.14.6 Interface Reference for Measuring the Board RTWP

This section provides the interface reference for measuring the Board RTWP.

Field Description

Cabinet No. Value: Master cabinet.

Subrack No. Subrack number of the WRFU/RRU.

Slot No. Slot number of the WRFU/RRU.

Reporting Period(s) Reporting period of measurement reports. Value: 1s.

Auto Save If this check box is selected, the testing data file is automatically

saved.

Text File Name Name of a .txt file to save the measurement data.

 

13.14.7 Interface Reference for Testing the Clock

This section provides the interface reference for testing the clock.

Field Description

Cabinet No. Value range: 0~7 .

Subrack No. Subrack number of the BBU. Value: 0~1.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

Page 191: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 191/204

Field Description

Slot No. Slot number of the WMPT. Value range: 6 to

73.

Auto Save If this check box is selected, the testing datafile is automatically saved.

Text File Name Name of a .txt file to save the measurement

data.

 

13.14.8 Interface Reference for Scanning the UL Frequency

This section provides the interface reference for scanning the UL frequency.

Field Description

Cabinet No. Value range: 0~62

Subrack No. Indicates the number of the subrack where the WRFU or RRU

is configured.

Slot No. Indicates the number of the slot where the WRFU or RRU is

configured.

Start RF Frequency

(200KHz)

Indicates the start frequency of the frequency scanning.

End RF Frequency

(200KHz)

Indicates the end frequency of the frequency scanning.

Scanning Frequency

Interval(200KHz)

Value range: 1 to 25.

Scanning Time Interval

(0.1s)

Value range: 2 to 600.

Auto Save If this check box is selected, the scanning data file is

automatically saved.

Text File Name Indicates the name of a .txt file to save the scanning data.

 

13.14.9 Interface Reference for Monitoring the Output Power

This section provides the interface reference for monitoring the output power.

Field Description

Cabinet No. Value: 0 ~ 62.

Subrack No. Subrack number of the WRFU/RRU.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

Page 192: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 192/204

Field Description

Slot No. Slot number of the WRFU/RRU.

Reporting Period(s) Interval between two measurement data reports. Value range: 2

seconds to 3,600 seconds.

Auto Save If this check box is selected, the monitoring data file is automatically

saved.

Text File Name Name of a .txt file to save the measurement data.

 

13.14.10 Interface Reference for Monitoring the Temperature

This section provides the interface reference for monitoring the temperature.

Parameter Description

Cabinet No. Value: 0 ~ 62.

Subrack No. Subrack number of the WMPT/WRFU/RHUB/RRU.

Slot No. Slot number of the WMPT/WRFU/RHUB/RRU.

Report Period (s) Value range: 2 seconds ~ 3600 seconds.

Auto Save If the check box is selected, the monitoring records are

automatically saved in the specified path.

Text File Name Name of a .txt file to save the measurement data.

 

13.14.11 Interface Reference for Querying the Resources of a Board

This section provides the interface reference for querying the resources of a board.

Field Description

Cabinet No. Value range: 0~7.

Subrack No. Subrack number of the BBU. Value range: 0~1.

Slot No. Slot number of the WBBP. Value range: 0~5.

Auto Save If this check box is selected, the monitoring data file is

automatically saved.

Text File Name Name of a .txt file to save the monitoring data.

 

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

Page 193: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 193/204

13.14.12 Interface Reference for the Cell Traffic ThroughputStatistics

This section provides the interface reference for the cell traffic throughput statistics.

Parameter Description

Local Cell ID ID of the local cell.

Auto Save If the check box is selected, the monitoring

records are automatically saved in the

specified path.

Text File Name Name of a .txt file to save the measurement

data.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 13 Monitoring the NodeB Performance in Real Time

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

Page 194: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 194/204

14 Managing Interference Detection for the

NodeB

About This Chapter

By analyzing the spectral and power distribution of sampled data, you can monitor the

interference in the frequency and time domains in radio environments.

Prerequisite

You have logged in to the NodeB LMT.

Context

When a local cell exists, the monitored frequency must be consistent with the uplink frequency

configured for the local cell.

If a local cell does not exist, the start frequency and end frequency must be within the frequency

 band supported by the RRU.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenance

tab.

Step 2 Double-click Interference Check . The Interference Check  dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set the corresponding parameters in the Interference Check  dialog box. For details about the

 parameters, see 14.1 Interface Reference for Interference Detection.

Step 4 Click OK .

A window is displayed, showing the real-time detection data in the form of a list and graph. In

the graph, the horizontal axis represents the frequency (MHz), and the vertical axis represents

the amplitude (dBm).

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 14 Managing Interference Detection for the NodeB

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

Page 195: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 195/204

NOTE

l The detection result can have an acceptable error within ±5 dB.

l You can select Show Power Graph to open a window that shows the power data in a graph. In the

graph, the horizontal axis represents the relative time (ms), and the vertical axis represents the amplitude

(dBm).

----End

14.1 Interface Reference for Interference Detection

This section provides the interface reference for interference detection.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 14 Managing Interference Detection for the NodeB

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

Page 196: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 196/204

14.1 Interface Reference for Interference Detection

This section provides the interface reference for interference detection.

Field Description

Cabinet No. Value range: 0~62.

Subrack No. Number of the subrack where the RRU/WRFU is configured

Slot No. Number of the slot where the RRU/WRFU is configured

Band Range Band I to band IX can be selected.

Start Frequency No. Start frequency number for the detection

End Frequency No. End frequency number for the detection

Start Frequency (MHz) Start frequency that the system automatically calculates according

to the start frequency No.

End Frequency (MHz) End frequency that the system automatically calculates according

to the end frequency No.

Module Type

[Compensator]

Module type for the detection

File Path Path to the directory where the sampling files are saved. Two

sampling files are downloaded each time.

FTP Setting The value can be Default Server or Third-Party Server.

IP This field is set by the user and relevant only if Third-Party

Server is selected from the FTP Setting drop-down list.

User Name This field is set by the user and relevant only if Third-Party

Server is selected from the FTP Setting drop-down list.

Password This field is set by the user and relevant only if Third-Party

Server is selected from the FTP Setting drop-down list.

 

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 14 Managing Interference Detection for the NodeB

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

Page 197: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 197/204

15 Commissioning the NodeB Equipment

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to commission the NodeB equipment by sending transparent

messages and performing COM port redirection.

15.1 Starting the Serial Port Redirection

You can start the serial port redirection to obtain the operating status of the system for clearing

the faults in a board.

15.2 Starting CANBUS Redirection

This section describes the procedure for starting CANBUS redirection to learn the running state

of the system for further diagnosis of board faults.

15.3 Sending Transparent Messages

This section describes how to send transparent message. Transparent messages are categorized

into simulated and board test messages. The trans parent messages are sent directly from the

LMT to the host without processing. The response from the host provides information for 

locating faults and commissioning.

15.4 Interface Reference for Commissioning the NodeB Equipment

This section describes the interface reference for commissioning the NodeB equipment.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 15 Commissioning the NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

Page 198: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 198/204

15.1 Starting the Serial Port Redirection

You can start the serial port redirection to obtain the operating status of the system for clearing

the faults in a board.

Context

l The default save path of the output information is LMT installation directory\client\output

\NodeB\ LMT software version\NodeB test.

l The default file name is Commredirect_year-month-day-hour-minute-second .

l The file is automatically saved in .txt format.

l There are two types of serial port redirection, which are out-band serial port redirection

and non out-band serial port redirection. When the BBU Board Maintenance Link Failure

alarm is reported, the serial port information of the disconnected board can be traced only

through the out-band serial port redirection. In normal cases, the non out-band serial port

redirection is recommended, because you can specify a program module of the board to

 perform the serial port redirection.

l The serial port redirection can be simultaneously performed on a maximum of 10 boards.

For each board, a maximum of one users can start the serial port redirection task at the same

time.

l The information of each task is displayed on a new tab page that is arranged in cascading

mode in the window.

Procedure

Step 1 On the LMT, select Test > Start CommRedirect. The Config Command Redirect dialog box

is displayed.

Step 2 Set the parameters in the dialog box. For the parameter details, see 15.4.1 Interface Reference

for Setting the Serial Port Redirection.

Step 3 Click OK . A dialog box is displayed. The information in the displayed dialog box helps to locate

the fault(s) in a specified board.

----End

15.2 Starting CANBUS RedirectionThis section describes the procedure for starting CANBUS redirection to learn the running state

of the system for further diagnosis of board faults.

Context

l The default save path is LMT installation directory\client\output\NodeB\ LMT software

version number \NodeB test.

l The default file name is . Commredirect_year-month-day-hour-minute-second .txt.

l The extension name of the file automatically saved is .txt.

l

The COM port redirection can be performed simultaneously on 10 boards maximum. For each board, a maximum of one users are allowed to start this task simultaneously.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 15 Commissioning the NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

Page 199: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 199/204

l The information of each task is displayed on a new tab page that is arranged in cascading

mode in the window.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Local Maintenance Terminal window, select Test > CANBUS Redirect. The Config

Command Redirect dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Set the corresponding parameters in the dialog box. For the parameter details, see15.4.3

Interface Reference for Setting the Serial Port Redirection.

Step 3 Click OK .

If information about the corresponding serial port is displayed on the maintenance console, the

redirection has succeeded.

Step 4 In the Local Maintenance Terminal window, select Test > SerialCmd. The SerialCmd dialog

 box is displayed, see 15.4.4 Interface Reference for SerialCmd .

Step 5 Type the serial port command. The execution result is displayed in the serial port redirection

window. Locate the board fault based on the execution result.

----End

15.3 Sending Transparent Messages

This section describes how to send transparent message. Transparent messages are categorized

into simulated and board test messages. The transparent messages are sent directly from the

LMT to the host without processing. The response from the host provides information for 

locating faults and commissioning.

Context

NOTE

The function of an analog message is to trigger an event. To obtain the response from the host, use the

COM port redirection or message tracing function.

Procedure

Step 1 Select Test > Transparent Message. The Transparent Message dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Set the corresponding parameters in the dialog box. For the parameter details, see 15.4.2

Interface Reference for Transparent Messages.

Step 3 Click OK . A dialog box is displayed, indicating whether the messages are sent successfully.

----End

15.4 Interface Reference for Commissioning the NodeBEquipment

This section describes the interface reference for commissioning the NodeB equipment.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 15 Commissioning the NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

Page 200: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 200/204

15.4.1 Interface Reference for Setting the Serial Port Redirection

This section describes the parameters for the serial port redirection.

Field DescriptionCabinet No. Indicates the cabinet number of the board.

Frame No. Indicates the frame number of the board.

Slot No. Indicates the slot number of the board.

 

15.4.2 Interface Reference for Transparent Messages

This section describes the interface reference for sending transparent messages.

Field Description

Message Type You can choose: Board Test and Simulative Message.

Sender CPU ID The sender CPU ID is valid when the message type is Simulative

Message.

Sender PID The sender PID is valid when the message type is Simulative Message.

Receiver CPU ID CPU ID of the receiver 

Receiver PID PID of the receiver 

Message Body Content of the message is displayed in hex format.

 

15.4.3 Interface Reference for Setting the Serial Port Redirection

This section describes the parameters for the CANBUS redirection.

Field Description

Cabinet No. Indicates the cabinet number of the board.

Frame No. Indicates the frame number of the board.

Slot No. Indicates the slot number of the board.

Redirect Type This can be set to Board or CBUS.

Baud Rate Default value: BAUD_9600.

 

15.4.4 Interface Reference for SerialCmd

This section describes the parameters for the SerialCmd.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 15 Commissioning the NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

Page 201: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 201/204

Field Description

Cabinet No. Indicates the cabinet number of the board.

Frame No. Indicates the frame number of the board.

Slot No. Indicates the slot number of the board.

Message Body Type the serial port command.

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 15 Commissioning the NodeB Equipment

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

Page 202: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 202/204

16 Managing NodeB Frequency Spectrum

Scanning 

About This Chapter

This section describes how to manage NodeB frequency spectrum scanning. This task enables

users to view information about frequency spectrum with information about the time domain

and frequency domain during operation collected. This task also enables users to review

frequency spectrum history.

Context

High-precision online carrier scanning scans cell frequencies in current use for interference,

including a small number of frequency sidebands. Wideband online carrier scanning scans a

continuous frequency spectrum within a certain range, including all frequencies in current use

and the frequency spectrum between the frequencies. All-spectrum scanning scans offline an

entire frequency spectrum that an RF can work on.

NOTE

The cell must be deactivated before offline frequency spectrum scanning. For a multi-mode cell, all cells

in different modes must be deactivated.

Procedure

Step 1 In the navigation pane of the Local Maintenance Terminal window, click the Maintenancetab.

Step 2 Double-click Spectrum > FFT Frequency Scan. The FFT Frequency Scan dialog box is

displayed.

For detailed description of parameters in the FFT Frequency Scan dialog box, see16.1

Interface Reference for FFT Frequency Spectrum Scanning.

Step 3 Set parameters in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK  and the frequency spectrum scanning result is displayed in the Chart tab page.

Step 5 Review saved frequency spectrum information by using the frequency spectrum review tool.

----End

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 16 Managing NodeB Frequency Spectrum Scanning

Issue 03 (2011-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

Page 203: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 203/204

Page 204: Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

8/10/2019 Nodeb Lmt User Guide(v200r013_03)(PDF)-En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nodeb-lmt-user-guidev200r01303pdf-en 204/204

16.1 Interface Reference for FFT Frequency SpectrumScanning 

This section describes the interface reference for FFT frequency spectrum scanning.

Field Description

Cabinet No. Number of the cabinet housing the TRX board to be

scanned.

Subrack No. Number of the subrack housing the TRX board to be

scanned.

Slot No. Number of the slot housing the TRX board to be

scanned.

S M d S l t CARRIER MODE

 NodeB

LMT User Guide 16 Managing NodeB Frequency Spectrum Scanning


Recommended